2004 armada owner's manual

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own-er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiaritywith controls and maintenance requirements, as-sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Pre-teenchildren should be seated in the rearseat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this owner’s manual forimportant safety information.

For descriptions specified for four-wheel drivemodels, a mark is placed at the begin-ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features foroff-road use, failure to operate four-wheeldrive models correctly may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident. Be sure to read“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVINGThis vehicle will handle and maneuver dif-ferently from an ordinary passenger carbecause it has a higher center of gravityfor off-road use. As with other vehicleswith features of this type, fail-ure to oper-ate this vehicle correctly may result inloss of control or an accident.Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-road driving precautions”, and “Avoidingcollision and rollover”, and “Driving safetyprecautions”, in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLEThis vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect its performance,safety or durability, and may even violategovernmental regulations. In addition,damage or performance problems result-ing from modifications may not be cov-ered under NISSAN warranties.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Z REVIEW COPY:—2004 Pathfinder Armada(wzw)Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna)09/10/03—debbie X

The inside pages of this manual containa minimum of 50% recycled fibers,including 10% post-consumer fibers.

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

© 2003 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.GARDENA, CALIFORNIA

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gar-dena, California.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL


The inside pages of this manual containa minimum of 50% recycled fibers,including 10% post-consumer fibers.

Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication toproduce the finest in safe, reliable and economicaltransportation. Your vehicle is the product of a suc-cessful worldwide company that manufactures carsand trucks in over 17 countries and distributes themin 170 nations.

NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufacturedby Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded inTokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world-wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largestautomaker in the world. In addition to cars andtrucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks, marineengines, boats and other diversified products.

NISSAN has made a substantial and growing in-vestment in North America. NISSAN’s commitmentis over $6 billion dollars in capital investments infacilities across the continent. Some of the facilitiesinclude the Nissan Manufacturing facilities in Can-ton, Mississippi and in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle

styling design at Nissan Design America, Inc. in SanDiego, California, and engineering at Nissan Tech-nical Center North America in Farmington Hills,Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employs more than21,000 people throughout the United States,Canada, and Mexico. An additional 60,000 peoplework for the 1,250 NISSAN and INFINITI dealersacross North America.

NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to theCanadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppli-ers and over 150 dealers employ approximately4,500 people. These include company employeesand the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada.In addition, many Canadians work for companiesthat supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with ma-terials and services ranging from the operation ofport facilities and transportation services, to thesupply of lubricants, parts and accessories.

NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and com-puters in automobiles, and has led the industry inimproving both performance and fuel efficiencythrough new engine designs and the use of syn-thetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The com-pany has also developed ways to build quality into itsvehicles at each stage of the production process,both through extensive use of automation and —most importantly — through an awareness thatpeople are the central element in quality control.

From the time the parts arrived from our suppliersuntil you took delivery of your new NISSAN, dozensof checks were made to ensure that only the best jobwas being done in producing and delivering yourvehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure thatwhen you take your NISSAN to your dealer formaintenance, the service technician will perform hiswork according to the quality standards that havebeen established by NISSAN.

Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As youknow, seat belts are an integral part of the safetysystems that will help protect you and your passen-gers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.We urge you to use the seat belts every time youdrive the vehicle.

The NISSAN story of growth and achievement re-flects our major goal: to provide you, our customer,with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsman-ship — a product that we can be proud to build andyou can be proud to own.

WFW0014

WELCOME TO THE WORLD OF NISSAN


NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments or ques-tions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. mainland and Alaska customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Hawaii customers1-808-836-0888 (Oahu Number)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. mainland and Alaska customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, California 90248-0191

For Hawaii customersNissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii2880 Kilihau St.Honolulu, Hawaii 96819

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM


Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Z REVIEW COPY:—2004 Pathfinder Armada(wzw)Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna)09/17/03—tbrooks X

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9


1. 3rd row bench seat belts (P. 1-31)2. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-31)3. Supplemental curtain side-impact and

rollover air bags (P. 1-14)4. Front seat belts (P. 1-31)5. Supplemental front impact air bags

(P.1-14)6. Seats (P. 1-2)7. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) (P.1-22)8. Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-27)9. Supplemental side impact air bag

(if so equipped) (P. 1-14)10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-56)11. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-58)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0021

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents


1. Engine hood (P. 3-10)2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-22)3. Windshield (P. 8-18)4. Power windows (P. 2-44)5. Door locks, keyfob, keys

(P. 3-3, 3-5, 3-2)6. Mirrors (P. 3-18)7. Tire pressure (P. 9-11)8. Flat tire (P. 6-2)9. Tire chains (P. 8-35)10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)11. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-24)12. Fog light switch (P. 2-27)13. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-12)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0020

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

Z REVIEW COPY:—2004 Pathfinder Armada(wzw)Owners Manual (owners)—USA English (nna)09/26/03—tmchalpi X

1. Roof rack (P. 2-43)2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)3. Glass hatch (P. 3-15)4. Rear window washer (P.2-23)5. Glass hatch release (P.3-15)6. Back door release (P. 3-13)7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)8. Fuel filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-15, P. 9-3)9. Fuel filler door (P. 3-15)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0019

EXTERIOR REAR



1. Rear ventilators (P. 4-112. Storage (P. 2-32)3. DVD entertainment system

(if so equipped) (P. 4-41)4. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-47)5. Map lights (P. 2-51)6. Sun visors (P. 3-17)7. HomeLinkT (P. 2-51)8. Glove box (P. 2-33)9. Seats (P. 1-2)10. Cup holders (P. 2-37)11. Luggage storage (P. 2-40)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0022

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT



1. Driver, center and passenger vents(P. 4-11)

2. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-27)3. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-24)4. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) (P. 4-38)5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-14, P. 2-28)6. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)7. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-15)8. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-22, 2-23)

9. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)10. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)11. Navigation system* controls (if so

equipped) (P. 4-2)12. Audio system controls (P. 4-27, 4-32)13. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-14)14. Glove box (P. 2-34)15. Climate controls (P. 4-12, 4-21)16. Aux jack (P. 4-37)WIC0646

INSTRUMENT PANEL



17. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-29)

18. Power outlet (P. 2-31)19. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch (P. 2-30)20. Tow mode switch (P. 2-31)21. Shift selector lever (P. 5-9)22. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-23)23. Hazard lights (P. 2-28)24. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P.5-17)25. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-16)26. Rear sonar system off switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-30)27. Pedal position adjustment switch

(P. 3-17)28. Back door open/close switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-10)*: Refer to the separate Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.



1. Battery (P. 8-13)2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)3. Transmission dipstick (P. 8-11)4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)7. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)8. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)9. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)10. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)11. Coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LDI0368

ENGINE COMPARTMENT LOCATIONS



Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock brakewarning light

2-13

Automatictransmissioncheck warninglight

2-13

Automatictransmissionpark warninglight (model)

2-13

or

Brake warninglight

2-13

Warninglight

Name Page

Charge warninglight

2-14

Check suspen-sion warninglight (if soequipped)

2-14

Door openwarning light

2-14

Engine oil pres-sure low/enginecoolant tem-perature highwarning light

2-14

4WD warninglight (model)

2-15

Low fuel warn-ing light

2-15

Warninglight

Name Page

Low tire pres-sure warninglight

2-15

Low washerfluid warninglight

2-16

Seat belt warn-ing light andchime

2-16

Supplementalair bag warninglight

2-16

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS



Indicatorlight

Name Page

Automatictransmissionposition indica-tor light

2-17

Cruise mainswitch indicatorlight

2-17

Cruise setswitch indicatorlight

2-17

4WD shift indi-cator light(model)

2-17

or

Front passengerair bag statuslight

2-17

Indicatorlight

Name Page

High beam in-dicator light(Blue)

2-17

Malfunctionindicator lamp(MIL)

2-17

Security indica-tor light (NVIS)

2-18

Slip indicatorlight

2-18

Transfer 4LOposition indica-tor light(model)

2-18

Turnsignal/hazardindicator lights

2-19

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Vehicle dy-namic controloff indicatorlight

2-19



1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental air bags

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment — passengerside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front power seat adjustment (for driver’sseat and if so equipped for passenger’sseat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42nd row captain’s chair adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52nd row bench seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31

Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-35Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40Installation on 2nd row captain’s chairs(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42Installation on 2nd row bench seats(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46Installation on 3rd row bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58Installation on front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61


WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat and adjust the seat properly. See“Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” laterin this section.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT — PASSENGER SIDE

WARNING

● Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation. The seat may movesuddenly and could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags


Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes to helpobtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions onseat belt usage” later in this section). Also, theseatback can be reclined to allow occupants torest when the vehicle is stopped.

WARNING

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat tomake sure it is securely locked.

LRS0244 LRS0245

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental air bags 1-3


FRONT POWER SEATADJUSTMENT (for driver’s seat and ifso equipped for passenger’s seat)

WARNING

● Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation. The seat may movesuddenly and could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-resetoverload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 seconds,then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for along period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto-matic drive positioner operation.

Forward and backwardMoving the switch forward or backward will slidethe seat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

RecliningMove the recline switch backward until the de-sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackforward again, move the switch forward andmove your body forward. The seatback will moveforward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes to helpobtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions onseat belt usage” later in this section). Also, theseatback can be reclined to allow occupants torest when the vehicle is stopped.

WRS0276



Seat lifter (driver’s seat)Push the front or rear end of the switch up ordown to adjust the angle and height of the seatcushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up or downto adjust the seat lumbar area.

2ND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever andlean back.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to helpobtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions onseat belt usage” later in this section). Also, theseatback can be reclined to allow occupants tosleep when the vehicle is stopped.

WRS0277 LRS0278 WRS0369



WARNING



Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd rowThe 2nd row captain’s chairs can be tipped for-ward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row benchseat. To enter the 3rd row s1 lift up on the latchlocated on the upper corner of the seatback onthe 2nd row captain’s chair and fold the seatbackforward at an angle over the seat base. This willrelease the back of the seat so it may be tippedforward.

Then s2 lift up on the lower corner of the seatbase and tip the 2nd row captain’s chair forward.To exit the 3rd row bench seat lift up on the samelatch and fold the seatback forward onto the seatbase. Then lift up on the seat base and tip itforward.

WRS0415 LRS0372



2ND ROW BENCH SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever andlean back.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to helpobtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions onseat belt usage” later in this section). Also, theseatback can be reclined to allow occupants tosleep when the vehicle is stopped.

WARNING



Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd rowThe outboard seating positions on the 2nd rowbench seat can be tipped forward for easy entryor exit from the 3rd row bench seat. To enter the3rd row s1 lift up on the latch located on theupper corner of the seatback on the 2nd rowbench seat and fold the seatback forward at anangle over the seat base. This will release theback of the seat so it may be tipped forward.

Outboard seatsWRS0369 WRS0414



Then s2 lift up on the lower corner of the seatbase and tip the outboard seating position of the2nd row bench seat forward. To exit the 3rd rowbench seat lift up on the same latch and fold theseatback forward onto the seat base. Then lift upon the seat base and tip it forward.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,push and hold the lock knob and push the headrestraint down.

The head restraints on the 2nd and 3rd row seatsare removable. The front seat head restraints arenot removable.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-erly as they may provide significant pro-tection against injury in an accident. Donot remove them. Check the adjustmentafter someone else uses the seat.

LRS0331 LRS0286



Adjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of your ears.

ARMRESTSTo use the armrests, pull them down to the rest-ing position.

Adjustable driver seat armrest (if soequipped)To use the adjustable driver seat armrest, pull itdown to the resting position. Adjust the armrestto the desired position by raising the armrest tothe desired height and releasing the armrest. Toreadjust the armrest to a lower position, raise thearmrest to the stowed position, then pull it to theresting position and adjust to the desired height.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

Folding the front passenger’s seatbackTo fold the front passenger’s seatback flat forextra storage length when transporting longitems:

s1 Slide the seat to the rear-most position. Liftup on the recline lever, located on the out-side edge of the seat, and fold the seatbackforward as far as it will go. Then lift up on thelatch located on the upper corner of theseatback to release the back of the seat.

WRS0134 WRS0368 LRS0341



s2 Once the seatback is released it will enableyou to fold the front passenger seatback flatover the seat cushion.

3. To return the front passenger’s seat to aseating position lift up on the seatback andpush it up to an upright position. Then pull upon the recline lever and lean the seatback toa proper seating position. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

WARNING

● If you fold the front passenger’s seat-back flat forward to carry longer ob-jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-cured and not near an air bag. In acrash, an inflating air bag might forcethat object toward a person. This couldcause severe injury or even death. Se-cure objects away from the area inwhich an air bag would inflate. See &“Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem” later in this section.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the front passenger’s seatwhen it is in the fold-down position. Useof these areas by passengers could re-sult in serious injury in an accident orsudden stop.

Folding the 2nd row captain’s chairs (ifso equipped)To fold the 2nd row captain’s chairs flat for maxi-mum cargo hauling:

s1 Remove the 2nd row center console, see“Console removal” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this Owner’s Manual.Pull the strap forward, located in the centerof the seat cushion, and fold the seat cush-ion toward the front of the vehicle.

LRS0342 LRS0332



s2 Then lift up on the recline lever to fold theseatback flat forward.

s3 There is a carpet panel flap that can befolded toward the back of the vehicle.

s4 The carpet panel flaps provide a level cargofloor when the 3rd row seats are also foldedflat. Reverse this process to return the 2ndrow captain’s chairs to a seating position.Make sure to properly raise the seat-back to an upright position and pushthe seat cushion down into place.

LRS0333 LRS0334 LRS0335



WARNING

● When the vehicle is being used to carrycargo, properly secure all cargo to helpprevent it from sliding or shifting. Donot place cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.


Folding the 2nd row bench seat (if soequipped)To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximumcargo hauling:

s1 Pull the strap forward, located in the centerof each seat cushion, and fold each seatcushion toward the front of the vehicle.

s2 Then lift up on the recline lever on the side ofthe outboard seats to fold the outboard seat-backs flat. To fold the center seatback flat,pull up on the strap on the edge of the centerseat cushion and fold the seatback towardthe front of the vehicle.

LRS0336 LRS0337



s3 There is a carpet panel flap on the back ofeach seat that can be folded toward theback of the vehicle

s4 The carpet panel flap provides a level cargofloor when the 3rd row seats are also foldedflat.

5. To return the outboard 2nd row bench seatsto a seating position reverse the process forthe outboard seats.

6. To return the center seat to a seating posi-tion, lift up on the pull strap on the back ofthe seat base while lifting on the seatback.Then push the seat cushion back into place.Make sure to properly raise the seat-back to an upright position and pushthe seat cushion down into place.

WARNING

● When the vehicle is being used to carrycargo, properly secure all cargo to helpprevent it from sliding or shifting. Donot place cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.



LRS0338 LRS0339



Folding the 3rd row bench seat

To fold the 3rd row bench seat flat for maximumcargo capacity:

Disconnect and secure the center seat belt andtongues into the retractor base. See “Stowingrear center seat belt” later in this section. Thenpull up on the latch located in the center of theseatback and fold it forward over the seat base.

To return the 3rd row bench seat to a seatingposition unfold the seatback and push it backuntil it latches into position.

WARNING



PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe driver and passenger supplemental front airbags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System),supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impactand rollover air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system:The NISSAN advanced air bag system can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Supplemental side-impact air bag system(if so equipped): This system can help cushionthe impact force to the chest area of the driverand front passenger in certain side impact colli-sions. The supplemental side air bag is designedto inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-pacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact and roll-over air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the head of occu-pants in front and rear outboard seating positionsin certain side impact or rollover collisions. In aside impact, the curtain air bags are designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

LRS0374

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM



In a rollover both curtain air bags are designed toinflate and remain inflated for a short time.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the seat belts and are not a substitutefor them. Seat belts should always be correctlyworn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-tance away from the steering wheel, instrumentpanel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” later inthis section for instructions and precautions onseat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

● The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, rollover, orlower severity frontal collision. Also,the front passenger air bag will not in-flate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit. See “Front passenger air bagand status light” later in this section.Always wear your seat belts to helpreduce the risk or severity of injury invarious kinds of accidents.

● The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat. The front air bags inflate withgreat force. Even with the NISSAN ad-vanced air bag system, if you are unre-strained, leaning forward, sitting side-ways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the supplementalfront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

WRS0031



● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. Theadvanced air bag system monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-senger air bag OFF under some condi-tions. This sensor is only used in thisseat. Failure to be properly seated andwearing the seat belt can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.See “Front Passenger air bag and sta-tus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when thesupplemental front air bag inflates.

WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133



WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags, side air bags or curtain side-impact and rollover air bags inflate ifthey are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properlyrestrained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043



WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. See“Child restraints” later in this sectionfor details.

ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256



WARNING

Supplemental side air bag (if so equipped)and curtain side-impact and rollover airbag:

● The supplemental side air bag and cur-tain side-impact and rollover air bagordinarily will not inflate in the event ofa frontal impact, rear impact, or lowerseverity side collision. Always wearyour seat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

Do not lean against the door.WRS0431

Do not lean against doors or windows.WRS0365

Do not lean against doors or windows.SSS0162



WARNING

● The seat belts, the supplemental sideair bags and curtain side-impact androllover air bags are most effectivewhen you are sitting well back and up-right in the seat. The side air bag andcurtain air bag inflate with great force.Do not allow anyone to place theirhand, leg or face near the side air bagon the side of the seatback of the frontseat or near the side roof rails. Do notallow anyone sitting in the front seats orrear outboard seats to extend theirhand out of the window or lean againstthe door. Some examples of dangerousriding positions are shown in the previ-ous illustrations.

WARNING

● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, donot hold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the side air bag inflates, you maybe seriously injured. Be especially care-ful with children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withsupplemental side air bag inflation.

WRS0363 SSS0159



1. SRS curtain side-impact and rollover airbag modules

2. SRS curtain side-impact and rollover airbag

3. Diagnosis sensor unit4. Supplemental front air bag modules5. Crash zone sensor6. Occupant classification system control

unit7. Occupant classification sensor8. Seat belt buckle switches9. Pre-tensioner retractor10. Satellite sensors11. Supplemental side air bag modules (if

so equipped)

WRS0366



NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad-vanced air bag system for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.

The driver supplemental front air bag is located inthe center of the steering wheel. The passengersupplemental front air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box. The supplemen-tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental front air bagsystem operation.

The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit,seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classificationsensor (weight sensor) and passenger seat belttension sensor. Inflator operation is based on theseverity of a collision and seat belt usage for the

driver. For the front passenger, it additionallymonitors the weight of an occupant or object onthe seat and seat belt tension. Based on informa-tion from the sensors, only one front air bag mayinflate in a crash, depending on the crash severityand whether the front occupants are belted orunbelted. Additionally, the front passenger airbag may be automatically turned OFF undersome conditions, depending on the weight de-tected on the passenger seat and how the seatbelt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-nated. See “Front passenger air bag and statuslight” later in this section for further details. Onefront air bag inflating does not indicate improperperformance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag inflates, afairly loud noise may be heard, followed by therelease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful anddoes not indicate a fire. Care should be taken tonot inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-ing. Those with a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants. Theycan help save lives and reduce serious injuries.However, an inflating front air bag may causefacial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thesupplemental front air bags inflate quickly in orderto help protect the front occupants. Because ofthis, the force of the front air bag inflating canincrease the risk of injury if the occupant is tooclose to, or is against, the front air bag moduleduring inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The supplemental front air bags operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.




Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status lightor is located under the climate controls. Itwill illuminate to indicate that the front passengerair bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. Thelight will illuminate if the front passenger seat isunoccupied or when other conditions are met asoutlined in this section. After turning the ignitionkey to the ON position the front passenger airbag status light illuminates and will turn off afterabout 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the frontpassenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (weight sensor). It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is designed todetect an occupant and objects on the seat byweight. It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child is in thefront passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys-tem is designed to turn the passenger air bagOFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if achild restraint of the type specified in the regula-tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’sweight can be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Weight sensor operation can vary de-pending on the front passenger seat belt sen-sors.

LRS0351 LRS0316



The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the automatic locking mode (child restraintmode). Based on the weight on the seat detectedby the weight sensor and the belt tension de-tected on the seat belt, the advanced air bagsystem determines whether the front passengerair bag should be automatically turned OFF asrequired by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF. Also, if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode), this couldcause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always besure to be seated and wearing the seat beltproperly for the most effective protection by theseat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installed

in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the weightsensor and seat belt sensors are designed tooperate as described above to turn the frontpassenger air bag OFF for specified child re-straints as required by the regulations. Failing toproperly secure child restraints and to use theautomatic locking mode (child restraint mode)may allow the restraint to tip or move in an acci-dent or sudden stop. This can also result in thepassenger air bag inflating in a crash instead ofbeing OFF. See “Child restraints” later in thissection for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied andthe seat belt is not buckled, the passenger air bagis designed not to inflate in a crash. However,heavy objects placed on the seat could result inair bag inflation, because of the object’s weightdetected by the weight sensor. Other conditionscould also result in air bag inflation, such as if achild is standing on the seat, or if two children areon the seat, contrary to the instructions in thismanual. Always be sure that you and all vehicleoccupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF. The light will illuminate(indicating the air bag is OFF and will not inflate)when the front passenger seat is not occupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat and the pas-senger air bag status light is illuminated (indicat-ing that the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seator using the seat belt properly. If a child restraintmust be used in the front seat, but the status lightis not lit (indicating that the air bag might inflate ina crash), it could be that the child restraint or seatbelt is not being used properly. If such situationshappen, properly position and restrain the occu-pant or child restraint. Otherwise reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the passenger air bag statuslight or , located under the climatecontrols, will illuminate and the supplemental airbag warning light , located in the meter andgauges area in the center of the instrument panel,will blink. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

Other supplemental front air bag precau-tions



WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the supplemen-tal front air bag inflates.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe supplemental front air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental frontair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly by placingmaterial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel or byinstalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat. Additionally, do notstow any objects under the front pas-senger seat or the seat cushion andseatback. Such objects may interferewith the proper operation of the occu-pant classification system (weightsensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thesupplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the seat belt systemmay result in serious personal injury.

● Work on and around the supplementalfront air bag system should be done bya NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-cal equipment should also be done by aNISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring should notbe modified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect inflation of the supplemental airbag system.

● The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental front airbag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.



Supplemental side-impact air bag (ifso equipped) and curtain side-impactand rollover air bags system

The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo-cated in the outside of the seatback of the frontseats. The supplemental curtain side-impact androllover air bags are located in the side roof railsin all 3 rows. These systems are designed to meetvoluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk ofinjury to out-of-position occupants. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed. The supplemental side air bags andcurtain side-impact and rollover air bags are de-

signed to inflate in higher severity side collisions,although they may inflate if the forces in anothertype of collision are similar to those of a higherseverity side impact. They are designed to inflateon the side where the vehicle is impacted. Theymay not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain side-impact and rollover air bags are alsodesigned to inflate in certain types of rollovercollisions or near rollovers.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental side air bagand curtain air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag and curtainair bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smoke is notharmful and does not indicate a fire. Care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritationand choking. Those with a history of a breathingcondition should get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe chest of the front occupants. Curtain side-impact and rollover air bags help to cushion theimpact force to the head of occupants in the frontand rear outboard seating positions in all rows.They can help save lives and reduce seriousinjuries. However, an inflating side air bag, orcurtain air bag may cause abrasions or otherinjuries.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the supplemental side airbag. Rear seat passengers should be seated asfar away as practical from the door finishers andside roof rails. The side air bags and curtain airbag inflate quickly in order to help protect theoccupants. Because of this, the force of the sideair bag and curtain air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, oris against, these air bag modules during inflation.The side air bag and curtain air bag will deflateafter the collision is over.

The supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact and rollover air bags operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ONor START positions.


WRS0381



WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if the supplemental side airbag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain side-impact and rollover airbag system components will be hot. Donot touch them; you may severely burnyourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain air bagsystem. This is to prevent accidentalinflation of the side air bag and curtainair bag or damage to the side air bagand curtain air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thesupplemental curtain air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental sideair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial near the seatback or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, around the side air bag.

● Work around and on the curtain air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag or cur-tain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors areyellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental side airbag and curtain air bag system and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Forfront seats)

WARNING

● The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot bereused after activation. It must be re-placed together with the retractor andbuckle as a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but the pre-tensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by your NISSANdealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt system. Thisis to prevent accidental activation ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt or damageto the pre-tensioner seat belt operation.Tampering with the pre-tensioner seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.



● Work around and on the pre-tensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pre-tensioner seatbelt system.

● If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensionerdisposal procedures are set forth in theappropriate NISSAN Service Manual.Incorrect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt systemactivates in conjunction with the supplemental airbag systems. Working with the seat belt retrac-tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehiclebecomes involved in certain types of collisions,helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’sretractor. These seat belts are used the same asconventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated,load limiters allow the seat belt to release web-bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against thechest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensionersystem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will not come on, will flash intermit-tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain onafter the ignition key has been turned to the ON orSTART position. In this case, the pre-tensionerseat belt may not function properly. They must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem and guide the buyer to the appropriatesections in this Owner’s Manual.



1. SRS Air bag warning labels2. SRS Side air bag warning label (if so

equipped)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front airbags and supplemental side air bags are placedin the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WRS0418



SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag and pre-tensionerseat belt systems. The circuits monitored by thesupplemental air bag warning light are the diag-nosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, satellitesensors, rollover sensor, front air bag modules,side air bag modules, curtain air bag modules,pre-tensioner seat belts and all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bag, supplemental side airbag, curtain air bag and pre-tensioner seat beltsystems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental frontair bag, supplemental side air bags and curtain airbag or pre-tensioner seat belt systems may notoperate properly. It must be checked and re-paired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSANdealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not oper-ate in an accident.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplementalside air bags, curtain air bags and pre-tensionerseat belts are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged,the supplemental air bag warning light remainsilluminated after inflation has occurred. Repairand replacement of these supplemental air bagsystems should be done only by a NISSANdealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple-mental side air bags, curtain air bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related parts should bepointed out to the person performing the mainte-nance. The ignition key should always be in theLOCK position when working under the hood orinside the vehicle.

LRS0100



WARNING

● Once a supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag or curtain airbag has inflated, the air bag module willnot function again and must be re-placed. Additionally, if any of thesupplemental front air bags inflate, theactivated pre-tensioner seat belts mustalso be replaced. The air bag moduleand pre-tensioner seat belt systemshould be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.The air bag module and pre-tensionerseat belt system cannot be repaired.

● The supplemental front air bag, side airbag and curtain air bag systems, andthe pre-tensioner seat belt systemshould be inspected by a NISSANdealer if there is any damage to thefront end or side portion of the vehicle.

● If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat beltsystem or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct supplementalair bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem disposal procedures are set forth inthe appropriate NISSAN ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat, your chances of being injured or killedin an accident and/or the severity of injury may begreatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encouragesyou and all of your passengers to buckle up everytime you drive, even if your seating position in-cludes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS



WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016



WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● Once the pre-tensioner seat belt hasactivated, it cannot be reused and mustbe replaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system componentsshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rearfacing child restraints. Front facing child re-straints are available for children who outgrowrear facing child restraints.

SSS0014



WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraintsfor infants and small children. See “Child Re-straints” later in this section.

In addition, there are many types of child re-straints available for larger children which shouldbe used for maximum protection.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. This isespecially important because your vehiclehas a supplemental restraint system (Airbag system) for the front passenger. See“Supplemental restraint system” earlier inthis section.

Infants and small children

NISSAN recommends that infants and small chil-dren be placed in child restraints that comply withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Ca-nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Youshould choose a child restraint that fits your ve-hicle and always follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for installation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided.

If the child’s seating position has a shoulder beltthat fits close to the face or neck, the use of abooster seat (commercially available) may helpovercome this. The booster seat should raise thechild so that the shoulder belt is properly posi-tioned across the top, middle portion of theshoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. Thebooster seat should fit the vehicle seat and havea label certifying that it complies with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child hasgrown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or nearthe face and neck, use the shoulder belt withoutthe booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoareas while the vehicle is moving. Thechild could be seriously injured or killed inan accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,and always position the lap belt as low as pos-sible around the hips, not the waist. Place theshoulder belt over your shoulder and across yourchest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over yourabdominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.



THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.


● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat and adjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

s2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock during asudden stop or on impact. A slow pullingmotion permits the seat belt to move, andallows you some freedom of movement inthe seat.

s3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

s4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions three-point seat belts have a cinchingmechanism for child restraint installation. It isreferred to as the automatic locking mode or childrestraint mode.

When automatic locking mode is activated theseat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the seatbelt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

WRS0137 WRS0138



retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in theemergency locking mode. See “Child restraints”later in this section for more information.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a passen-ger, the locking mode should not be acti-vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-fortable seat belt tension. It can alsochange the operation of the front passen-ger air bag. See “Front passenger air bagand status light” earlier in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

s1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows.

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139



Center of the 3rd row bench seatThe 3rd row center seat belt has a connectortongue s1 and a seat belt tongue s2 . Both theconnector tongue and the seat belt tongue mustbe securely latched for proper seat belt opera-tion.

WARNING

● Always fasten the connector tongueand the seat belt in the order shown.

● Always make sure both the connectortongue and the seat belt tongue aresecured when using the seat belt. Donot use it with only the seat belt tongueattached. This could result in seriouspersonal injury in case of an accident ora sudden stop.

SSS0240 SSS0241

LRS0432



Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt

When folding down the 3rd row seat, the rearcenter seat belt can be retracted into a stowedposition as follows:

s1 Release the connector tongue by inserting asuitable tool such as key into the connectorbuckle sA .

s2 Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base.

s3 Insert the seat belt tongue into the fabricsleeve so it will lay flat. Then secure theconnector tongue into the retractor base.

WARNING

● Do not unfasten the rear center seatbelt connector except when foldingdown the rear seat.

● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop.

Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt

Always be sure the 3rd row center seat beltconnector tongue and connector buckle are at-tached. Disconnect only when folding down therear seat.

To connect the buckle:

s1 Pull out the connector tongue from the re-tractor base.

s2 Pull out the seat belt tongue from the fabricsleeve.

s3 Pull the seat belt and secure the receiverbuckle until it clicks.

The center seat belt connector tongue and re-ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < mark.

The center seat belt connector tongue can beattached only into the rear center seat belt con-nector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seatbelt” earlier in this section.

WARNING

● Do not unfasten the rear center seatbelt connector except when foldingdown the rear seat.

LRS0433



● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (frontand 2nd row outboard seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, pull out s1 the adjustment button andmove the shoulder belt anchor s2 to the desiredposition, so the belt passes over the center of theshoulder. The belt should be away from your faceand neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulderbelt anchor into position.

WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

Front and 2nd row outboard seatsLRS0242



SEAT BELT EXTENDERSIf, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender is available which iscompatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oflength and may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. See a NISSANdealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint can re-sult in serious injury or death.

ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS



WARNING

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental front air bag could seri-ously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be usedin the rear seat.

● NISSAN recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

● An improperly installed child restraintcould lead to serious injury or death inan accident.

In general, child restraints are designed to beinstalled with the lap portion of a three-point typeseat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped witha universal child restraint lower anchor system,referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system. Some child re-straints include two rigid or webbing-mountedattachments that can be connected to theselower anchors. For details, see the “LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem” later in this section.

Child restraints for infants and small children ofvarious sizes are offered by several manufactur-ers. When selecting any child restraint, keep thefollowing points in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Always follow all recommendedprocedures.

All U.S. states and provinces of Canadarequire that infants and small children berestrained in an approved child restraint atall times while the vehicle is being oper-ated.

WARNING

● Improper use of a child restraint canincrease the risk or severity of injury forboth the child and other occupants ofthe vehicle.

WRS0256



● Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child re-straint, be sure to select one which willfit your child and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install some typesof child restraints in your vehicle.

● If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being in-jured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

● After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Tilt itfrom side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the belt holds therestraint in place. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 inch. If therestraint is not secure, tighten the beltas necessary, or put the restraint in an-other seat and test it again.

● For a front-facing child restraint, checkto make sure the shoulder belt does notgo in front of the child’s face or neck. Ifit does, put the shoulder belt behind thechild restraint. If you must install a frontfacing child restraint in the front seat,see “Installation on front passengerseat” later in this section.

● When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the childrestraint.

INSTALLATION ON 2ND ROWCAPTAIN’S CHAIRS (if so equipped)

WARNING

● The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision.



Front facingWhen you install a child restraint on the 2nd rowcaptain’s chairs, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It canbe placed in a front facing direction, de-pending on the size of the child. Adjust thehead restraint to its highest position. Alwaysfollow the restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts back toemergency locking mode when the seat beltis fully retracted.

Front Facing — step 1LRS0347





4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to tilt the child restraint from sideto side, and tug it forward to make sure thatit is securely held in place. It should not movemore than 1 inch.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore belt webbing out of the retractor, theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If the beltis not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Front Facing — step 4WRS0146




Rear facingWhen you install a child restraint on the 2nd rowcaptain’s chair, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Thedirection of the child restraint depends onthe type of the child restraint and the size ofthe child. Always follow the restraint manu-facturer’s instructions.



3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-gency locking mode when the seat belt isfully retracted.

Rear Facing — step 1LRS0352







6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore seat belt webbing out of the retractor,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode.


After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

INSTALLATION ON 2ND ROWBENCH SEATS (if so equipped)

WARNING







Front facingWhen you install a child restraint on the 2nd rowbench seat, follow these steps:




Front facing (outboard) — step 1LRS0376

Front facing (center) — step 1LRS0377





Rear facingWhen you install a child restraint on the 2nd rowbench seat, follow these steps:


Rear facing (outboard) — step 1LRS0373

Rear facing (center) — step 1LRS0375







Rear Facing — step 2WRS0383









INSTALLATION ON 3RD ROWBENCH SEAT

WARNING



● When installing a child restraint systemin the rear center position, both thecenter seat belt connector tongue andbuckle tongue must be secured. See“Attaching rear center seat belt” earlierin this section.

Front facing

WARNING

Front facing child restraints can be in-stalled in all 3rd row bench seat positions.However, front facing child restraints thatrequire the use of a top tether strap can beinstalled in the center 3rd row positiononly. Do not install a child restraint requir-ing a top tether strap in an outboard posi-tion and attempt to angle the tether to the3rd row center anchor.


Front Facing (outboard) — step 1LRS0357



When you install a child restraint on the 3rd rowbench seat, follow these steps:





Front Facing (center) — step 1LRS0358





Rear facingWhen you install a child restraint on the 3rd rowbench seat, follow these steps:




Rear Facing (outboard) — step 1LRS0362

Rear Facing (center) — step 1LRS0388






LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEM

LATCH system anchor point locations 2ndrow captain’s chairs (if so equipped)

WRS0364

LATCH anchor point labels 2nd row cap-tain’s chairs (if so equipped)

LRS0344



WARNING

● Attach LATCH system compatible childrestraints only at the locations shown. Ifa child restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

● The LATCH system anchors are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to two anchors located at certain seatingpositions in your vehicle. This system is known asthe LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-dren) system. This system may also be referred toas the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.With this system, you do not have to use a vehicleseat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicleis equipped with special anchor points that areused with LATCH system compatible child re-straints. Check your child restraint for a labelstating that it is compatible with the LATCH sys-tem. This information may also be in the childrestraint owner’s manual. If you have such a childrestraint, refer to the illustration for the seatingpositions equipped with LATCH system anchorswhich can be used to secure the child restraint.

The LATCH system anchors are located at therear of the seat cushion near the seatback. Alabel is attached to the seatback to help youlocate the LATCH system anchors.

LATCH child restraints generally require the useof a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap childrestraint” later in this section for installation in-structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

LATCH system anchor point locations 2ndrow bench seat (if so equipped)

WRS0416

LATCH anchor point labels 2nd row benchseat (if so equipped)

LRS0382



When you install a LATCH system compatiblechild restraint to the lower anchor attachments,follow these steps:

WARNING

Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH system an-chors, such as seat belt webbing or seatcushion material. The child restraint willnot be secured properly if the LATCH sys-tem anchors are obstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compatiblechild restraint, insert the child restraintLATCH system anchor attachments into theanchor points on the seat. If the child re-straint is equipped with a top tether, see“Top tether strap child restraint” later in thissection for installation instructions.

2. After attaching the child restraint and beforeplacing the child in it, use force to tilt thechild restraint from side to side and tug itforward to make sure that the child restraintis securely held in place. It should not movemore than 1 inch.

3. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINTIf your child restraint has a top tether strap, it mustbe secured to the anchor point provided behindits position.

WARNING

Child restraint anchor points are designedto withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat beltor the LATCH system (2nd row outboard seatpositions only), as applicable.

For the 2nd row bench seats (if so equipped)outboard seating positions only, adjust the headrestraint to its highest position and route the toptether strap between the head restraint and thetop of the seatback. Secure the tether strap to thetether anchor point on the floor directly behindthe seat. The center position of the 2nd rowbench seat is not equipped with a top tetheranchor point.

For the 2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped),adjust the head restraint to its highest positionand route the top tether strap between the headrestraint and the top of the seatback. Secure thetether strap to the tether anchor point on the floordirectly behind the seat.

The center position of the 3rd row bench seat isthe seating position that can use a top tetherstrap. The center 3rd row seat position does nothave a head restraint. Position the top tetherstrap over the top of the seatback and secure it tothe tether anchor bracket as shown later in thissection. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

WARNING

In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraintwith a top tether strap can only be used inthe center position. Do not place in anoutboard seating position and attempt toangle the tether strap to the centerposition.

For best child restraint fit, see the child restraintinstallation instructions in this section and thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.



Anchor point locationsAnchor points are located on the floor behind theoutboard seating positions only for the 2nd rowbench seat (if so equipped), on the floor behindthe 2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped) andon the floor of the cargo area behind the centerseat position on the 3rd row bench seat asshown.

If you have any questions when installing atop strap child restraint on the rear seat,consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

Flaps are provided in the carpet for easy accessto the anchor points for the 2nd row captain’schairs or 2nd row bench seats and are markedwith the label shown.

1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

LabelWRS0210

2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped)LRS0340



1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

2nd row bench seat (if so equipped)LRS0361

3rd row bench seat labelLRS0343

3rd row bench seatLRS0370



INSTALLATION ON FRONTPASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

● Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front passenger seat.Supplemental front air bags inflate withgreat force. A rear-facing child restraintcould be struck by the supplementalfront air bag in a crash and could seri-ously injure or kill your child.

● NISSAN recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position. Also, be surethe front passenger air bag status lightis illuminated to indicate the passengerair bag is OFF. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” earlier in this sec-tion for details.

● A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front passen-ger seat.

WRS0417 WRS0256 WRS0378





If you must install a child restraint in the front seat,follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the front pas-senger seat. It should be placed in afront-facing direction only. Move theseat to the rearmost position. Adjust thehead restraint to its highest position. Alwaysfollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions. Child restraints for infantsmust be used in the rear-facing direc-tion and therefore must not be used inthe front seat.








4. Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull upon the shoulder belt to remove any slack inthe belt.








7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 6.

8. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Thepassenger air bag status light should say“OFF” or . If this light is not illu-minated it may indicate a malfunction. Movethe child restraint to another seatingposition. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer.





MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Volt meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Compass and outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-12Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) . . . . . . . . 2-21

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . . 2-24Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-26Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-30Tow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

Instrument panel storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36


Overhead console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-372nd row center console (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-40Cargo area storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Power vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46Manual vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

Sunroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47Automatic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51HomelinkT universal transceiver (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-51

Programming HomeLinkT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52Programming HomeLinkT for Canadiancustomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53Operating the HomeLinkT universaltransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button . . . . . . 2-54If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54


1. Driver, center and passengerventilators (P. 4-11)

2. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-27)3. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-24)4. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) (P. 4-38)5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-14, P. 2-28)6. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)7. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-15)8. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-22, P. 2-23)

9. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)10. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)11. Navigation system* controls

(if so equipped) (P. 4-2)12. Audio system controls (P. 4-27, 4-32)13. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-14)14. Glove box (P. 2-34)15. Climate controls (P. 4-12, 4-21)16. Aux jack (P. 4-37)WIC0646

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls


17. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-29)

18. Power outlet (P. 2-31)19. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch (P. 2-30)20. Tow mode switch (P. 2-31)21. Shift selector lever (P. 5-9)22. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-23)23. Hazard lights (P. 2-28)24. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-17)25. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-16)26. Rear sonar system off switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-30)27. Pedal position adjustment switch

(P. 3-17)28. Back door open/close switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-10)*: Refer to the separate Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details. 1. Warning/indicator lights

2. Tachometer3. Speedometer4. Engine coolant temperature gauge5. Fuel gauge6. Engine oil pressure gauge

7. Automatic transmission fluid tempera-ture gauge (if so equipped)

8. Odometer/Twin trip odometer9. Volt meter

LIC0540

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3


1. Speedometer2. Odometer/twin trip display3. Change buttonSPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates vehicle speed inmiles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour(km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition key is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the change button changes the displayas follows:

Trip → Trip → Odometer only

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-ond resets the trip odometer to zero.

LIC0541 LIC0542



TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (r/min). Do not rev engine intothe red zone s1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause seriousengine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range s1 when the gauge needle pointswithin the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, stop thevehicle as soon as safely possible. If theengine is overheated, continued opera-tion of the vehicle may seriously damagethe engine. See “If your vehicle over-heats” in the “In case of emergency” sec-tion for immediate action required.

LIC0543 LIC0544



FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel filler lid islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips,

the lamp should turn off. If the

lamp remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function indicator lamp (MIL)” later inthis section.

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-tem oil pressure while the engine is running.When the engine speed is high, the engine oilpressure is also high. When it is low, the gaugeindicates the low oil pressure.

CAUTION

● This gauge is not designed to indicatelow engine oil level. Use the dipstick tocheck the oil level. (See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.)

LIC0545 LIC0546



● If the gauge needle does not move withthe proper amount of engine oil, havethe vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer. Continued vehicle operation insuch a condition could cause seriousdamage to the engine.

VOLT METERWhen the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-tion, the volt meter indicates the battery voltage.When the engine is running, it indicates the gen-erator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop belowthe normal range. If the needle is not in the normalrange (11 - 15 volts) s1 while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the charging systemis not functioning properly. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDTEMPERATURE GAUGE (if soequipped)

This gauge indicates the temperature of the au-tomatic transmission fluid. The automatic trans-mission fluid temperature is in the normal ranges1 when the gauge needle points within the zoneshown in the illustration.

LIC0547 LIC0548



CAUTION

● This gauge is not designed to indicatelow automatic transmission fluid level.Use the dipstick to check the fluid level.(See “5-speed automatic transmissionfluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

● If the gauge indicates automatic trans-mission fluid temperature over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. Have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer. Contin-ued operation of the vehicle may seri-ously damage the transmission.

This unit has the following functions:

● Measures terrestrial magnetism and indi-cates heading direction of vehicle

● Indicates outside air temperature

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAYPush the button when the ignition key is inthe ACC or ON position. The outside tempera-ture will be displayed s1 .

● To change from °F to °C, push and holdthe button for about 3 seconds untilthe display begins to flash. Press the buttonagain to toggle between °F and °C. Onceyou have selected °F or °C, the display willcontinue to flash for about 5 seconds, thenthe temperature will display.

LIC0583

COMPASS AND OUTSIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY



● When the outside temperature is between140°F (60°C) and 194°F (90°C), the displaywill read 140°F (60°C). When the tempera-ture is above 194°F (90°C), the display willread “SC”.

● When the outside temperature is betweenthan -40°F (-40°C) and -60°F (-51°C), thedisplay will read -40°F (-40°C). When thetemperature is below -60°F (-51°C), the dis-play will read “OC”.

● The outside temperature sensor is located infront of the radiator. The sensor may beaffected by road or engine heat, wind direc-tion and other driving conditions. The displaymay differ from the actual outside tempera-ture or the temperature displayed on varioussigns or billboards.

● Temperature display will not update unlessthe vehicle is moving faster than 12 MPH(20 km/h), or the ignition switch has beenOFF for 4 hours.

COMPASS DISPLAYPush the button when the ignition key is inthe ACC or ON position to display the directions1 .

N: northE: eastS: southW: west

If the display reads “CAL”, calibrate the compassby driving the vehicle in three complete circles atless than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by drivingyour vehicle on your everyday route. The com-pass will be calibrated once it has tracked threecomplete circles.



Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-graphical north is known as variance. In someareas, this difference can sometimes be greatenough to cause false compass readings. Followthese instructions to set the variance for yourparticular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about 8seconds. The current zone number will ap-pear in the display.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.Refer to the illustration. Record the zonenumber.

3. Press and hold the button until thenew zone number appears in the display.After you stop pressing the switch in, thedisplay will show a compass direction withina few seconds.

Inaccurate compass direction:

1. With the display turned on, push thebutton about 8 seconds, until the zone se-lection comes up (a number will be dis-played in the mirror compass window).

2. Toggle until correct zone is found and re-lease button.

WIC0355



3. The display will return to the normal com-pass mode within 5 seconds of no buttonactivity.

4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat steps 1through 3. See map.

● If the compass deviates from the correctindication soon after repeated adjustment,have the compass checked at an authorizeddealer.

● The compass may not indicate the correctcompass point in tunnels or while driving upor down a steep hill. (The compass returnsto the correct compass point when the ve-hicle moves to an area where the geomag-netism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect the op-eration of the compass.

● When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as it maycause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.



or Anti-lock brake warning light Low fuel warning light or Front passenger air bag statuslight

Automatic transmission check warning light Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission park warning light( model)

Low windshield washer fluid warning light Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

or Brake warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Security indicator light (NVIS)

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light

Check suspension warning light (if soequipped)

Automatic transmission position indicator light Transfer 4LO position indicator light( model)

Door open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant tem-perature high warning light

Cruise set switch indicator light Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light

4WD warning light ( model) 4WD shift indicator light ( model)

CHECKING BULBSWith all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key to the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , , ,,

The following lights come on briefly and then gooff:

or , , , , , ,,

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS



If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock brakewarning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is notfunctioning properly. Have the system checkedby a NISSAN dealer.

Turn off the engine, and start it again byslowly turning the ignition key (quickly do-ing so may cause the ABS light to stay onwhen there is nothing wrong). If the lightstays on, have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function ceases, but the regular brakingsystem continues to operate.

If the light comes on while you are driving,contact a NISSAN dealer for repair.

Automatic transmission checkwarning light

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the lightcomes on for about 2 seconds. If the light blinksfor approximately 8 seconds, it may indicate theautomatic transmission system is not functioningproperly. Have your NISSAN dealer check andrepair the transmission.

Automatic transmission parkwarning light ( model)

WARNING

● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates thatthe automatic transmission P (Park) po-sition will not function and the transfercase is in neutral.

● When parking, always make sure thatthe 4WD shift indicator light illuminatesand the parking brake is set. Failure toengage the 4WD shift switch in 2WD,AUTO, 4H or 4LO could result in thevehicle moving unexpectedly, resultingin serious personal injury or propertydamage.

● All mode 4WD: The warning light maycome on when the ignition switch is ONand the automatic transmission lever isshifted to the P position while shiftingthe transfer case between 4H and 4LO.Shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD,AUTO, 4H, or 4LO position again to turnoff the ATP warning light when thewarning light comes on. (Before shift-ing the 4WD switch into the 4LO posi-tion or out of 4LO in the 4H position,move the automatic transmission se-lector lever into the N position.) Shiftthe selector lever into the P positionand make sure that the 4WD shift indi-cator light is ON and the ATP warninglight is OFF.)

This light indicates that the automatic transmis-sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-fer control is not secured in any drive positionwhile the automatic transmission selector lever isin the P (Park) position, the transmission willdisengage and the wheel will not lock.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.



When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight comes on when the parking brake is applied,and also warns of a low brake fluid level. If thelight comes on while the engine is running withthe parking brake not applied, stop the vehicleand perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake and clutch fluid” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thebrake system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Check suspension warninglight (if so equipped)

This light may indicate a malfunction in the auto-matic load leveling suspension.

For additional information, refer to “Jacking upand removing the damaged tire” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are notclosed securely while the ignition key is in the ONposition.

Engine oil pressurelow/Engine coolant tempera-ture high warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure or highengine coolant temperature.

If the light flickers or comes on during normaldriving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop theengine and allow it to cool. If the light remains onafter checking the oil and coolant, stop the en-gine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer orother authorized repair shop.

This light is not designed to indicate a lowoil or low coolant level. Check the oil levelwith the dipstick and check the coolant level onthe reservoir. See “Engine oil” and “Checkingengine coolant level” in the “Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual. Also see “Ifyour vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.



CAUTION

● Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Such damage is not cov-ered by warranty. Turn off the engine assoon as it is safe to do so.

● If the gauge indicates engine coolanttemperature over the normal range,stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos-sible. If the engine is overheated, con-tinued operation of the vehicle may se-riously damage the engine. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section for immediate ac-tion required.

4WD warning light( model)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the keyswitch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after theengine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,the warning light will either remain illuminated orblink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Startingand driving” section.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksduring operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WDwarning light turns on when you aredriving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the4WD shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,move the automatic transmissionshift selector lever to the N positionand shift the 4WD shift switch to2WD.

● If the warning light is still on after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuelin the tank when the fuel gauge needlereaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warninglight

This light warns of low tire pressure.

NISSAN’s low tire pressure warning system is atire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tirepressure of all tires except the spare. When thetire pressure monitoring system warning light islit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them to the properpressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire infor-mation placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Eachtire, including the spare, should be checkedmonthly when cold and set to the recommendedinflation pressure as specified in the vehicle plac-ard and owner’s manual.

The recommended inflation pressure may also befound on the Tire and Loading Information Label.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with very low tirepressure (lower than 28 psi, 193 kPa), the lightwill illuminate and the chime will sound for about10 seconds.



For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning system” in the “Starting and driving”section and “Low tire pressure warning system”in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the light does not come on with thekey switch turned ON, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

● If the light comes on while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident and couldresult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label to turnthe low tire pressure warning light OFF.If the light still comes on while drivingafter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated and the low tire pressurewarning system will not function. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

CAUTION

● The low tire pressure warning system isnot a substitute for the regular tire pres-sure check. Be sure to check the tirepressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 20 MPH (32 km/h), the lowtire pressure warning system may notoperate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield washer fluidwarning light

This light comes on when the windshield washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluidas necessary. See the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition key is turned to the ON or START positionand remains illuminated until the driver’s seat beltis fastened. At the same time, the chime soundsfor about 7 seconds unless the driver’s seat beltis securely fastened.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental air bags” section for pre-cautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bags, supplemental sideair bags (if so equipped), curtain side-impact androllover air bags, and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tems need servicing and your vehicle must betaken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.



● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioner seat belts may not function properly.For additional details see “Supplemental restraintsystem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental air bags” section of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain side-impact and rollover air bagsystems (if so equipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not oper-ate in an accident.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmission posi-tion indicator light

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-tion, this indicator light shows the automatictransmission selector lever position. See “Drivingthe vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

4WD shift indicator light( model)

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to ON.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator light will illuminate the position selected bythe 4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode to theother.

or Front passengerair bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light (or ) will be lit and the passenger front airbag will be OFF depending on how the frontpassenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalair bags” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction indicator lamp(MIL)

If this indicator lamp comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator lamp may also come onsteady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or ifthe vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure



the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly,and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons of fuelin the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the lamp shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

Operation

The malfunction indicator lamp will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction indicator lamp on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel filler cap. Ifthe fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tightenor install the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The lamp should turn off aftera few driving trips. If the lamp doesnot turn off after a few driving trips, have thevehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. Youdo not need to have your vehicle towed tothe dealer.

● Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected bya NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have yourvehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Security indicator light (NVIS)

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is inthe LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This functionindicates the security system equipped on thevehicle is operational.

For additional information, see “Security system”later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery

road conditions may exist if the slip indicatorblinks on. If this happens, adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when youturn the ignition key to the ON position. The lightwill turn off after about 2 seconds if the system isoperational. If the light does not come on or gooff, have the traction control system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

The system operates in all transmission shift leverpositions, but the system can upshift the trans-mission only as high as the indicated shift leverposition.

Transfer 4LO position indica-tor light ( model)

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to ON.

This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch isset in the 4LO position with the ignition key in theON position.

If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO positionand the light blinks, stop the vehicle, drive slowlyforward and the light will turn on.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop thevehicle, move the automatic transmission selec-tor lever to the N (Neutral) position, then push the4WD shift switch and move it to 4LO or 4H.



The transfer case may be damaged if you shift theswitch while driving.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switchbetween 4H and 4LO unless you have firststopped the vehicle and moved the automatictransmission shift selector lever to N (Neutral).Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicatorlight turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switchto 4LO.

The indicator light may blink while shiftingfrom one drive mode to the other.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle dynamic control offindicator light

This indicator light comes on when the vehicledynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. Thisindicates the vehicle dynamic control system isnot operating.

Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch againor restart the engine and the system will operatenormally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)system” in the “Starting and driving” section ofthis manual.

The vehicle dynamic control light also comes onwhen you turn the ignition key to the ON position.The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if thesystem is operational. If the light stays on orcomes on along with the SLIP indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the vehicle dynamiccontrol system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the vehicle dynamic control system is op-erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear thesystem working when starting the vehicle or ac-celerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The front disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a front brake pad requires re-placement, it makes a high pitched scrapingsound when the vehicle is in motion, whether ornot the brake pedal is depressed. Have thebrakes checked as soon as possible if the warn-ing sound is heard.

Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch in the OFF position, achime sounds when the driver’s door is opened ifthe headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.



Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System—NVIS

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual andaudio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle aredisturbed.

How to arm the vehicle security sys-tem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with the key, power door lockswitch or with the keyfob.

Keyfob operation:

● Push the button on the keyfob.All doors lock. The hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once to indicateall doors are locked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” (vehicleswithout navigation system) in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section or“Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles withnavigation system) in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner and audio systems”section.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comeson. The light stays on for about 30seconds. The vehicle security system is nowpre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-hicle security system automatically shiftsinto the armed phase. The light beginsto flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the30-second pre-arm time period, the door isunlocked by the key or the keyfob, or theignition key is turned to ACC or ON, thesystem will not arm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe door, the system may not arm. Fur-thermore, if the key is turned beyondthe vertical position toward the unlockposition to remove the key, the systemmay be disarmed when the key is re-moved. If the indicator light fails toglow for 30 seconds, unlock the dooronce and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition key in the OFF posi-tion.

LIC0559

SECURITY SYSTEMS



Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after ap-proximately 45 seconds. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by unlockinga door with the key, or by pressing thebutton on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key orkeyfob (even if the door is unlocked by usingthe inside lock knob or the power door lockswitch).

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm stops only by unlocking a door with thekey, or by pressing the button on the key-fob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM (NVIS)The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS)will not allow the engine to start without the use ofa registered NVIS key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered NVISkey (for example, when interference is caused byanother NVIS key, an automated toll road deviceor automatic payment device on the key ring),restart the engine using the following proce-dures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 5 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered NVIS key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered NVIS key on aseparate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFAC-TURER FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOIDTHE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATETHE EQUIPMENT.



Security indicator lightThe security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACCposition. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) is operational.

If the NVIS is malfunctioning, the light will remainon while the ignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNVIS service as soon as possible. Pleasebring all NVIS keys that you have whenvisiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

s1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can beadjusted by turning the knob toward sA(Slower) or sB (Faster). Also, the intermit-tent operation speed varies in accordancewith the vehicle speed. (For example, whenthe vehicle speed is high, the intermittentoperation speed will be faster.)

NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the drivingspeed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion. Refer to “Personalized settingsmenu” (vehicles without navigation sys-tem) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve-hicles with navigation system) in the “Dis-play screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems”section later in this manual.

s2 Low — continuous low speed operation

s3 High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up s4 to have one sweep opera-tion of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

LIC0474 LIC0592

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH



● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

The rear window wiper and washer operate whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF positionto operate the wiper.

s1 Intermittent – intermittent operation (not ad-justable)

s2 Low – continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward s3 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the window and ob-scure your vision. Warm the rear windowwith the defroster before you wash therear window.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.



LIC0468

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH



To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors:

Type AStart the engine and turn the rear window de-froster switch clockwise. The rear window de-froster indicator light on the display screencomes on. Turn the switch clockwise again toturn the defroster off.

Type BStart the engine and push the rear window de-froster switch. The indicator light on the switchcomes on. Press the switch again to turn thedefroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

s1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

s2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

Type ALIC0487

Type BLIC0488 LIC0560

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH



Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for up to 180 secondsafter you turn the key to OFF and all doorsare closed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and thetime delay for autolight shutoff can be ad-justed. For vehicles with navigation sys-tem, see “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve-hicles with navigation system) in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems”section later in this manual.For vehicles without navigation system,see your NISSAN dealer.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion s1 .

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and adoor is opened and left open, the headlightsremain ON for 5 minutes. If another door isopened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minutetimer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch tothe OFF, , or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor located in the top sideof the instrument panel. The autolight sen-sor controls the autolight; if it is covered,

the autolight sensor reacts as if it is darkout and the headlights will illuminate. Ifthis occurs while parked with the engineoff and the key in the ON position, yourvehicle’s battery could become discharged.

LIC0561



Headlight beam select

s1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

s2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

s3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is turned OFF while theheadlight switch is in the or posi-tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

After the headlights automatically turn off with theheadlight switch in the or position,the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes ifthe headlight switch is moved to the OFF positionand then turned to the or position.

CAUTION

● Be sure to turn the light switch to theOFF position when you leave the ve-hicle for extended periods of time, oth-erwise the battery will go dead.

● Never leave the light switch on whenthe engine is not running for extendedperiods of time even if the headlightsturn off automatically.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when

the parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC0562



INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is inthe , or AUTO position (with auto-lights activated).

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-ment panel lights when driving at night.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

s1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

s2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position. To turn them off,turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on for the fog lights tooperate.

LIC0392 LIC0563 LIC0564



Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchin any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

LIC0394 LIC0604

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH

HORN



The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (ifso equipped).

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the (low) or (high) posi-tion of the switch, as desired, depending onthe temperature. The indicator light in theswitch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switchoff.

CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

● If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

LIC0469

HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)



The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine and the system will operate normally. See“Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the“Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

The rear sonar system is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safe todo so before backing up. Always back upslowly.

The rear sonar system is active when the ignitionis in the ON position and the shift selector lever isin R (Reverse).

When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft (1.8m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.

The rear sonar system can be disabled by push-ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,

the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.Push the switch again to enable the system. Theindicator light will go off.

The system will automatically reset the next timethe ignition switch is turned on.

See “Rear sonar system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WIC0534 LIC0471

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH(if so equipped)



Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavytrailer or hauling a heavy load. Using tow mode atother times may cause unnecessary transmissionshifting and reduced fuel economy.

Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode.The indicator light on the tow mode switch illumi-nates when tow mode is selected. Press the towmode switch again to turn tow mode OFF.

Tow mode is automatically canceled when thekey is turned OFF.

For additional information, refer to “Tow mode” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion later in this manual.

The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones.

The power outlets located on the driver’s side ofthe instrument panel and in the luggage area arepowered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

The power outlets located on the passenger’sside of the instrument panel and in the 2nd roware powered only when the ignition key is in theACC or ON position.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● Only certain power outlets are designedfor use with a cigarette lighter unit. Seeyour NISSAN dealer for additionalinformation.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

LIC0594

Front rowLIC0549

2nd rowLIC0550

TOW MODE SWITCH POWER OUTLET



● Use this power outlet with the enginerunning. (If the engine is stopped, thiscould result in a discharged battery.)

● Avoid using when the air conditioner,headlights or rear window defroster ison.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may blow.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGETRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays tohelp prevent injury in an accident or sud-den stop.

The rubber mats can be removed for cleaning.

Luggage areaLIC0551

Side trayLIC0565

STORAGE



CONSOLE BOX

WARNING

The center console box should not beused while driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

CAUTION

● This power outlet is not designed foruse with a cigarette lighter unit.

● Do not use accessories that exceed 12volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not usedouble adapters or more than one elec-trical accessory.

Console box storage traysCenter tray (if so equipped)LIC0566 LIC0574



Console box storagePull up on the lever s1 to open the console box lids2 .

Console box lockUse the master key to lock s1 or unlock s2 theconsole box.

GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

WIC0642 LIC0591 LIC0578



SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING

The sunglasses case should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

MAP POCKETSLIC0567 LIC0589



SEATBACK POCKETThe seatback pocket is located on the back of thedriver seat. The pocket can be used to storemaps.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

Storage bins

WARNING

Keep storage bins closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

Push the button to open a storage bin.

Push the lid up to close.

LIC0575Small bin

LIC0568

Medium binLIC0569



CUP HOLDERS

To open the front cup holders, lift the cup holderlid.

To close, lower the lid.

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

Large binLIC0570

FrontLIC0552



Position the arm on the adjustable cup holder sothat the cup is held securely.

To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the frontconsole), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.

AdjustableLIC0553

2nd row (rear of front console)LIC0554

Rear console (if so equipped)LIC0555



CAUTION

Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about in thevehicle and possibly injure people duringsudden braking or an accident.

2nd row bench (if so equipped)LIC0556

3rd rowLIC0557

Bottle holderLIC0558



2ND ROW CENTER CONSOLE (if soequipped)Pull up on the lever to open the console box lid.

Removing the 2nd row center consoleboxTo remove the 2nd row center console box:

s1 Lift out the cup holder tray.

s2 Pull up on the handle to tilt the console box up.

s3 Move the console box toward the front of thevehicle and lift it out.

To reinstall the 2nd row center console box:

1. Slide the console box over the base towardthe rear of the vehicle.

2. Push down to lock the console box in place.

3. Replace the cup holder tray.

CARGO AREA STORAGE BINTo open the cargo area storage bin, pull down onthe tab and pull the lid off.

LIC0576 LIC0577 LIC0571



To access the floor storage area, push down s1to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle s2to lift the luggage board.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargowith ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● Use suitable ropes and hooks to securecargo.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggagearea. It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside of a vehicle. In a colli-sion, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

Side finisherWhen hooking on ropes, do not apply a load ofmore than 55 lb (245 N) to a single sA hook or 44lb (196 N) to a single sB hook.

LIC0572 LTI0089



Floor hooksDo not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)to a single hook.

CARGO NET (if so equipped)

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargoarea from moving around while the vehicle is inmotion.

To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to theretainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the hooks fromthe cargo net retainers.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seatbacks.In a sudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

● Be sure to secure all four hooks into theretainers. The cargo restrained in thenet must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) orthe net may not stay secured.

LTI0090 LIC0628



ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roofrack. Do not load more than 200 lbs (91 kg) onthe entire roof rack sA . If an additional rear cross-bar (if so equipped) is installed, the maximumload capacity for the rear roof rack sB is 125 lbs

(56 kg). Be careful that your vehicle does notexceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWRare located on the Safety Compliance Certifica-tion Label (located on the driver’s door pillar). Formore information regarding GVWR and GAWR,

refer to the “Technical and consumer information”section later in this manual.

The rear crossbar can be adjusted forward andbackward. Raise the lock levers s1 and adjustthe crossbar to the desired position. Lower thelock levers. Place your luggage on the bars andsecure the luggage with rope to the utility loopss2 . Do not place luggage on the side rails or tierope directly to the side rails. Always be sure thelock levers are lowered to keep the crossbar inplace. Do not use utility loops for any purposeother than securing luggage.

LIC0593

Rear roof rack with additional crossbar(if so equipped)

LIC0629



WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un-secured cargo could cause personalinjury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing itemsfrom the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-ably lift the items onto the roof rack fromthe ground, use a ladder or stool.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents. 1. Window lock button

2. Door lock/unlock button3. Front passenger side automatic switch4. Right rear passenger window switch5. Left rear passenger window switch6. Driver side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close the front and rearpassenger windows.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position, or for about 45seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the

LIC0579

WINDOWS



OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the windows is canceled. To opena window, push the switch and hold it down. Toclose a window, pull the switch and hold it up. Tostop the opening or closing function at any time,simply release the switch.

Front passenger power window switchThe passenger window switch operates only thecorresponding passenger window. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down s1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver side window can be opened or closed.Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

Rear power window switchThe rear passenger window switches open orclose only the corresponding passenger window.To open the window, push the switch and hold itdown s1 . To close the window, pull the switch ups2 .

LIC0580 LIC0581



Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down (onlydriver’s side shown) to the second detent andrelease it; it need not be held. The window auto-matically opens all the way. To stop the window,lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held.

Auto-reverse functionThe auto-reverse function can be activated whena window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught in awindow equipped with automatic operation as itis closing, the window will be immediately low-ered. POWER VENT WINDOWS (if so

equipped)

Use the vent window switch located on the over-head console to open and close the power ventwindows. The windows cannot be operatedseparately.

To open the power vent windows, press and holdthe switch toward OPEN.

To close the windows, press and hold the switchtoward CLOSE.

The power vent windows operate when the igni-tion key is in the ON position, or for about 45seconds after the ignition key is turned to the

LIC0410 LIC0582



OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s dooris opened during this 45 second period, power tothe vent windows is cancelled.

MANUAL VENT WINDOWS (if soequipped)To open a manual vent window, pull the latchhandle toward you until it releases.

To lock the window in the open position, push thelatch handle rearward until it locks.

To close a manual vent window, pull the latchhandle toward you and push the rear portion ofthe latch toward the rear of the vehicle until itlocks.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof will only operate when the ignitionkey is in the ON position. The automatic sunroofis operational for about 45 seconds, even if theignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF position.If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Sliding the sunroofTo fully open the sunroof, push the switch towardthe open position s3 .

To fully close the sunroof, push the switch towardthe close position s4 .

LIC0524 LIC0584

SUNROOF (if so equipped)



To open or close the sunroof part way, push theswitch in any direction s5 while the roof is slidingopen or closed to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt the sunroof up, push the tilt switch towardthe up position s1 . When the sunroof is open, itwill automatically close and then tilt up.

To tilt the sunroof down, push the tilt switchtoward the down position s2 .

Restarting the sunroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable afterthe battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormalitydetected. Use the following reset procedure toreturn sunroof operation to normal.

1. If the sunroof lid is open, push the tiltingswitch repeatedly toward the down positions2 to fully close the lid.

2. Finally, push and hold the tilting switch formore than 2 seconds toward the down po-sition s2 to reestablish the lid’s home posi-tion.

The sunroof should now operate normally.

Auto reverse function (when closing ortilting down the sunroof)

The auto reverse function can be activated whenthe sunroof is closed or tilted down by automaticoperation when the ignition key is in the ONposition or for about 45 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the sunroof oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the sunroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in thesunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof willimmediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in thesunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi-ately tilt up.

If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens, then the sunroof will fully closegradually. In this case, make sure nothing iscaught in the sunroof.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open sunroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe sunroof opening while the vehicle isin motion or while the sunroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the sunroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on the sun-roof or surrounding area.

Sun shade

Open and close the sun shade by sliding it for-ward or backward.



If the sunroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair thesunroof.

The interior light has a three-position switch andoperates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position s1 , theinterior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutesunless the ignition key is in the ACC or ONposition.

When the switch is in the DOOR position s2 , theinterior lights and puddle lamps (if so equipped)will stay on for about 30 seconds when:

● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a keyor the power door lock switch while all doors

are closed and the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer isactivated when:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, akey, or the power door lock switch.

● The ignition switch is turned ON.

When the switch is in the OFF position s3 , theinterior lights do not illuminate, regardless of doorposition. The puddle lamps (if so equipped) comeon when any front or rear passenger door isopened.

The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-utes while doors are open to prevent the batteryfrom becoming discharged.

LIC0585

INTERIOR LIGHT



NOTE:

The footwell and door step lights illuminatewhen the driver and passenger doors areopen regardless of the interior light switchposition. These lights will turn off auto-matically after about 30 minutes whiledoors are open to prevent the battery frombecoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

CONSOLE LIGHTThe console light s1 will turn on whenever theparking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjustedwith the illumination brightness control.

The personal lights on the overhead console canbe swiveled 360 degrees. To turn on the light,press the button. Press the button again to turnoff the light.

LIC0587 LIC0588

PERSONAL LIGHTS



To turn the map lights on, press the switches. Toturn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-position switch. To operate, push the switch tothe desired position.

ON: The light is illuminated.

Normal (center) position: The light illuminateswhen any door is opened or unlocked by thekeyfob. The light turns off after 30 seconds whenall doors are closed.

OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless ofdoor position or lock status.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver provides aconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters intoone built-in device.

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks and se-curity systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLinkT will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale ofthe vehicle, the programmed HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver buttons should beerased for security purposes. For addi-tional information refer to “ProgrammingHomeLinkT” later in this section.

LIC0586 LIC0590

MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT HOMELINKT UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)



WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot detectan object in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT

1. To begin, press and hold the two outerHomeLinkT buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light s1 blinks slowly (after20 seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press andhold both the HomeLinkT button you want toprogram and the hand-held transmitter but-ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 hasbeen completed.

LIC0526 LIC0527



4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLinkT flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidly flash-ing light indicates successful programming.To activate the garage door or other pro-grammed device, press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLinkT button — releasingwhen the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkT blinksrapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,HomeLinkT has picked up a “rolling code”garage door opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to train theHomeLinkT to complete the programmingwhich may require a ladder and another per-son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-gram button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lens toaccess the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, youhave 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.Use the help of a second person for conve-nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-ing the garage door opener program button,quickly and firmly press and release theHomeLinkT button you’ve just programmed.Press and release the HomeLinkT button upto 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLinkT button should now be pro-grammed. (To program the remainingHomeLinkT buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLinkT buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficultyprogramming your HomeLinkT buttons, pleaserefer to the HomeLinkT web site at:www.homelink.com or call 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261).

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toHomeLinkT, continue to press and hold theHomeLinkT button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLinkT”) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-sible damage to the garage door openercomponents.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKTUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-propriate programmed HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver button. The red indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being transmitted.



PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLinkT surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLinkT andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLinkT is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition – keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment. The phone numbers are located inthe Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,to clear all programming, press and hold the twooutside buttons and release when the indicatorlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINKT BUTTONTo reprogram a HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverbutton, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT but-ton. Do not release the button until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76mm) away from the HomeLinkT surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight begins to flash rapidly, release bothbuttons.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver button hasnow been reprogrammed. The new device can beactivated by pushing the HomeLinkT button that

was just programmed. This procedure will not af-fect any other programmed HomeLinkT buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENIf your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that has beenprogrammed into HomeLinkT. Consult the Owner’sManual of each device or call the manufacturer ordealer of those devices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will needto reprogram the HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver with your new transmitter information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) This de-vice must accept any interference that maybe received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D. CV2V67690



3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS)keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Operating the manual back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Operating the power back door(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11Cancel switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Back door release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Glass hatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Fuel filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Pedal position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22


1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-der chip and chrome NISSAN brandsymbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip3. Key number plate4. Transponder chipA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM (NVIS) KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the masteror valet keys which are registered to the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System components in yourvehicle. These keys have a transponder chip inthe key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the console boxlock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key withsomeone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as five NVIS keyscan be used with one vehicle. You should bring allNVIS keys that you have to your NISSAN dealerfor registration. This is because the registrationprocess will erase the memory of all key codes

previously registered into the NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System. After the registration pro-cess, these components will only recognize keyscoded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (NVIS) during registration. Any key that is notgiven to your dealer at the time of registration willno longer be able to start your vehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

WPD0128

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front s1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral s3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors s4 .

Opening and closing windowsThe driver’s door key operation allows you toopen and close windows equipped with auto-matic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

● To close the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey to the front of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

Driver’s sideLPD0240

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3


LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position s1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position s2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHTo lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver or front passenger side), to thelock position s1 . When locking the door this way,be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver or front passenger side)to the unlock position s2 .

Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver or frontpassenger) is moved to the lock position with thekey in the ignition and any door open, all doorswill lock and unlock automatically. This helps toprevent the keys from being accidently lockedinside the vehicle.

Inside lockLPD0241

Door lock switchLPD0183



CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCKChild safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on theinterior lights and puddle lamps (if so equipped),and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfobfrom outside the vehicle.

Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigationsystem, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”later in this section. For vehicles with navigationsystem, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” inthe “Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems” section later in this manual.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance ofapproximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. Theeffective distance depends upon the conditionsaround the vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged.

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of that key-fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-authorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

LPD0242

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM



HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Push the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard warning lightsflash twice and the horn beeps once toindicate all doors are locked.

● When the button is pushed with alldoors locked, the hazard warning lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

● If a door is open and you push thebutton, the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard warning lights willnot flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For vehicleswithout navigation system, refer to “Silencing thehorn beep feature” later in this section. For ve-hicles with navigation system, refer to “Vehicleelectronic systems” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-tion later in this manual. Unlocking doors

Push the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doorsare completely closed with the ignition key inany position except the ON position.

● The interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped) turn on and the light timer acti-vates for 30 seconds when the interior lightswitch is in the DOOR position with theignition key in any position except the ONposition.

LPD0209 LPD0210



Push the button on the keyfob again within5 seconds.

● All doors unlock.

● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doorsare completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into theignition and turning to the ON or START position,locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing theinterior light switch to the off position.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pushed,all doors will lock automatically within 1 minuteunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe key is turned from OFF to ON.

Opening windowsThe keyfob allows you to open windowsequipped with automatic operation simulta-neously.

● To open the windows, press the but-ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec-onds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the keyfob.

This opening windows function of the keyfob canbe suspended using a CONSULT-II diagnostictool. Please contact a NISSAN dealer.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the keyfob.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drivepositioner memoryIf the vehicle is equipped with automatic drivepositioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memorysetting.

See “Automatic driver positioner” later in thissection. Operating the power back door (if so

equipped)Push and hold the button on the keyfob for about0.5 second to open or close the back door. Thehazard warning lights flash and a chime soundsto indicate the power open or power close se-quence has started.

The door will reverse direction immediately dur-ing power open or power close if the keyfobbutton is pressed. A chime will sound to an-nounce the reversal.

For more information, see “Back door” later in thissection.

LPD0243



Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 25 seconds, or

● any button is pushed on the keyfob.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard lights will flash three times to confirmthat the horn beep feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard lights will flash once and the horn willsound once to confirm that the horn beep featurehas been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

Using the interior lightsPush the button on the keyfob once to turnon the interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped).

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into theignition, locking the doors with the keyfob orpushing the interior light switch to off position.

LPD0211 LPD0262



BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

s1 Open the lid using a coin.

s2 Remove the battery.

s3 Install a new battery with the “+” facingdown.

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 orequivalent.

s4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the manufacturer for compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

LPD0214



s1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver side instrument panel. Thehood will spring up slightly.

s2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to theside as illustrated with your fingertips andraise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and makesure it locks into place.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

WARNING

● Always be sure the back door has beenclosed securely to prevent it from open-ing while driving.

● Do not drive with the back door open.This could allow dangerous exhaustgases to be drawn into the vehicle. See“Exhaust gas” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section of this manual.

LPD0244

HOOD BACK DOOR



OPERATING THE MANUAL BACKDOOR

WARNING

Make sure that all passengers have theirhands, etc. inside the vehicle before clos-ing the back door.

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors including the back door simulta-neously.

To open the back door, pull up on the handle.

To close, lower and push the back door downsecurely.

OPERATING THE POWER BACKDOOR (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle be-fore closing the back door.


NOTE:

To open, close or reverse the power backdoor, the shift selector lever must be in P(Park). Also, the power back door will notoperate if battery voltage is low.

Power Open:The power back door automatically moves fromthe fully closed position to the fully open positionin approximately 6 seconds. The power openfeature can be activated by the switch on thekeyfob, the instrument panel switch and by theoutside opener handle. The hazard lights flash

LPD0245Rear pillar switch

LPD0247

Instrument panel switchLPD0283



and a chime sounds to indicate the power opensequence has been started.

● The back door can be opened by the instru-ment panel switch and the keyfob even if thevehicle is locked. The door will individuallyunlock and open. Once the back door isclosed, its lock will align to the vehicle’s lockor unlock status.

● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the door opens.

● The back door must be unlocked to open itwith the outside opener handle.

● The switch on the rear pillar cannot be usedto open the back door.

A warning chime will sound if the shift selectorlever is moved out of P (Park) during a poweropen operation.

Power Close:The power back door automatically moves fromthe fully open position to the secondary position.When the door reaches the secondary position,the cinching motor engages and pulls the door toits primary latch position. Power close takes ap-proximately 8 seconds. The power close featurecan be activated by the switch on the keyfob, theinstrument panel and the rear pillar. The hazardlights flash and a chime sounds to indicate thepower close sequence has been started.

● If the outside opener handle is activatedwhile the cinching motor is engaged, thecinching motor will disengage and releasethe latch.

● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the door closes.

● The switch on the rear pillar can only be usedto close the back door if the cancel switch isnot in the on position.

Reverse:The power back door will reverse direction imme-diately during power open or power close if thekeyfob, instrument panel or rear pillar switch ispressed or if the outside handle is lifted. A chimewill sound to announce the reversal.

Auto Reverse:If an obstacle is detected during power open orpower close, a warning chime will sound and thedoor will reverse direction and return to the fullopen or full close position. If a second obstacle isdetected, the door motion will stop and the drivemotor will disengage. The back door will entermanual mode.

A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the backdoor. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch stripduring power close, the door will reverse direc-tion and return to the full open position.

NOTE:

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,the power close function will not operate.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the door.

Manual Mode:If power operation is not available, the back doormay be operated manually. Power operation maynot be available if the cancel switch is in the onposition, if multiple obstacles have been de-tected in a single power cycle, or if battery volt-age is low.



Safe Mode:If the back door gas stays s1 lose pressure, thepower back door safe mode is activated. Whenthe safe mode is activated, the back door slowlycloses. A continuous warning chime sounds untilthe door is in the fully down position. Then thedoor will be pulled to the closed and latchedposition by a motor.

The power back door cannot be opened usingthe switches at any time in the safe mode.

The auto reverse function remains active whilethe door is closing in the safe mode.

Do not operate the back door again until it ischecked by your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● If the power back door does not stayopen or if the door unexpectedly closesat any time while a continuous warningchime sounds, do not operate the backdoor. There may be a pressure loss inone or both of the back door gas stays.Have the back door inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● Do not activate the power back door ifone or both of the back door gas staysare removed. Damage to the back dooror power back door mechanisms mayoccur.

CANCEL SWITCH

Press the switch toward the CANCEL position todisable the rear pillar switch and the outsidehandle. The back door can still be opened andclosed using the switch on the instrument paneland keyfob.

BACK DOOR RELEASE

WARNING

● Always be sure the back door has beenclosed securely to prevent it from open-ing while driving.

LPD0250 LPD0248



● Do not drive with the back door open.This could allow dangerous exhaustgases to be drawn into the vehicle. See“Exhaust gas” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section of this manual.

CAUTION

● If the power back door does not stayopen or if the door unexpectedly closesat any time while a continuous warningchime sounds, do not operate the backdoor. There may be a pressure loss inone or both of the back door gas stays.Have the back door inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● Do not activate the power back door ifone or both of the back door gas staysare removed. Damage to the back dooror power back door mechanisms mayoccur.

Manual back door (if so equipped)If the back door cannot be locked or unlockedwith the door lock switch or the keyfob due to adischarged battery, follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the backdoor.

2. Move the lever up to lock or down to unlock.

Power back door (if so equipped)If the back door cannot be opened with the doorlock switch or keyfob due to a discharged battery,follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the backdoor.

2. Move the lever up to open the door.

Manual releaseLPD0251

Power releaseLPD0252



To open, pull up on the smaller outside handle torelease the glass hatch, then pull up on the glasshatch. To close, lower and push the glass hatchdown securely.

NOTE:

The back door must be unlocked in order toopen the glass hatch.

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn thecap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turnthe cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks areheard.

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder s1 whilerefueling.

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury. Then remove the cap.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator lamp to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

LPD0246 LPD0253

GLASS HATCH FUEL FILLER LID



● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact withthe container while you are filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

● Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap

properly may cause the mal-

function indicator lamp (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the lamp illuminates be-

cause the fuel filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.

The lamp should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the lamp

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionearlier in this manual.

TILT OPERATIONPull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust thesteering wheel up or down to the desired posi-tion.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheelin place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

LPD0254

STEERING WHEEL



The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-justed for driving comfort.

Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust thebrake and accelerator pedal position forward s1or backward s2 . Pedal adjustment can only beperformed when:

● Ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC position

● Ignition switch is ON and the selector leveris in the P (Park) position

The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-justed separately.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the pedal position with yourfoot on the pedal.

LPD0255

LPD0256

PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT SUN VISORS



s1 To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor.

s2 To block glare from the side, remove themain sun visor from the center mount andswing the visor to the side.

s3 To block glare from the side and front, swingdown the sub-sun visor.

s4 Slide the extension sun visor in or out asneeded.

CAUTION

● Do not store the sun visor before return-ing it to its original position.

● Store the main sun visor after storingthe extension sun visor and sub-sunvisor.

● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-edly downward.

VANITY MIRRORSTo access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. The vanitymirror will illuminate when the mirror cover isopen.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDEMIRRORThe inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally changes reflection according to the intensityof the headlights of the vehicle following you.

When the switch is in the ON position, theindicator light s1 will illuminate and excessiveglare from the headlights of the vehicle behindyou will be reduced. When the switch of theinside mirror is in the OFF position, the insidemirror will operate normally.

LPD0257 LPD0258

MIRRORS



For information on HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Move the small switch s1 to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired positionusing the large switch s2 .

WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.You could lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

LPD0237



Foldable outside mirrorsPull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

The automatic drive positioner system has twofeatures:

● Memory storage function

● Entry/exit function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, acceleratorand brake pedals, and outside mirrors can bestored in the automatic drive positioner memory.Follow these procedures to use the memory sys-tem.

1. Set the automatic transmission selector le-ver to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

LPD0259 LPD0260

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (ifso equipped)



3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator andbrake pedals, and outside mirrors to thedesired positions by manually operatingeach adjusting switch. For additional infor-mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats,seat belts and supplemental air bags” sec-tion and “Pedal position adjustment” and“Outside mirrors” earlier in this section.

During this step, do not turn the ignition toany position other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for atleast 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.After the indicator light goes off, the se-lected positions are stored in the selectedmemory (1 or 2).

If memory is stored in the same memory switch,the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking a keyfob to a stored memorypositionA keyfob can be linked to a stored memory posi-tion with the following procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-tion.

2. While the indicator light for the memoryswitch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-onds, press the button on the keyfob.The indicator light will blink. After the indica-tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to thatmemory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch,press the button on the keyfob. The driv-er’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and out-side mirrors will move to the memorized position.

Confirming memory storage

● Turn the ignition ON and push the SETswitch. If the main memory has not beenstored, the indicator light will come on forapproximately 0.5 seconds. When thememory has stored the position, the indica-tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec-onds.

● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse blows, the memory will be canceled. Insuch a case, reset the desired positionsusing the following procedures.

1. Open and close the driver’s door more thantwo times with the ignition key in the LOCKposition.

2. Reset the desired position using the previ-ous procedure.

Selecting the memorized position1. Set the automatic transmission selector le-

ver to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for atleast 1 second.

The driver’s seat, accelerator and brakepedals, and outside mirrors will move to thememorized position with the indicator lightblinking, and then the light will stay on forapproximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTIONThis system is designed so that the driver’s seatwill automatically move when the automatictransmission selector lever is in the P (Park)position. This allows the driver to get into and outof the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

● When the driver’s door is opened with theignition key turned to LOCK.



● When the ignition key is turned from ACC toLOCK with the driver’s door open while theautomatic transmission selector lever is inthe P (Park) position.

The driver’s seat will return to previous position:

● When the key is inserted into the ignitionswitch.

● When the driver’s door is closed with the keyturned to LOCK.

● When the key is turned from ACC to ONwhile the automatic transmission selectorlever is in the P (Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-celed. For vehicles with navigation system, see“Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Displayscreen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys-tems” section of this manual. For vehicles withoutnavigation system, see your NISSAN dealer.

SYSTEM OPERATIONThe automatic drive positioner system will notwork or will stop operating under the followingconditions:

● when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h).

● when any two or more of the memoryswitches are simultaneously pushed while

the automatic drive positioner is operating.

● when the adjusting switch for the driver’sseat is turned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

● when the memory switch (1 or 2) is notpushed for at least 1 second.

● when the seat has been already moved tothe memorized position.

● when no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

The automatic drive positioner system can beadjusted and canceled. For vehicles with naviga-tion system, see “Vehicle electronic systems” inthe “Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems” section of this manual. For ve-hicles without navigation system, see yourNISSAN dealer.



4 Display screen, heater, air conditionerand audio systems

Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Names of the components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use joystick and “ENTER” button . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use “PREV” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use the “TRIP” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4How to use the “SETTING” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22Rear control button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23

Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-25Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27FM-AM-SAT radio with compact discchanger (Type A and B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-32CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38Rear audio controls (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40

NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41

Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Playing a digital video disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50


WARNING

● Positioning of the heating or air condi-tioning controls and display controlsshould not be done while driving in or-der that full attention may be given tothe driving operation.

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“ENTER” button — This is a button on the con-trol panel.

LHA0388

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if soequipped)

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems


“Display” key — This is a select key on thescreen. By selecting this key you can proceed tothe next function.

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS1. brightness control button (P. 4-11)

2. PREV (previous) button (P. 4-3)

3. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-3)

4. SETTING button (P. 4-6)

5. TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-4)

6. DEST button*

7. ROUTE button*

8. MAP button*

9. GUIDE VOICE button*

10. zoom out button*

11. zoom in button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND“ENTER” BUTTON

Choose an item on the display using the joystickand push the “ENTER” button for operation.

HOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTONThis button has two functions.

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you touch “PREV” button during setup, thesetup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

If you touch this button after the setup is com-pleted, the setup will start over, and the displaywill return to the climate control or audio modeand Navigation screen.

SETTING UP THE START-UPSCREENWhen you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, theSYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on thescreen. Read the warning and select the “IAGREE” (English) or “ENTER” (Français) keythen push the “ENTER” button.

If you do not push the “ENTER” button, theNavigation system will not proceed to the nextstep display.

If you do not touch the button or screen key formore than 1 minute on the TRIP, SETTING orSTART-UP screen, the screen will change toTRIP screen automatically.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3


HOW TO USE THE “TRIP” BUTTONWhen the “TRIP” button is pushed, the followingmodes will display on the screen.

Warning message (if there are any) → TRIP 1(Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, AverageSpeed) → TRIP 2 → FUEL ECONOMY (AverageFuel Economy, Distance to Empty) → MAINTE-NANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation) → OFF.

Trip 1, trip 2 and fuel economy itemsTo reset the TRIP 1, TRIP 2 and FUELECONOMY, select the “RESET” key using thejoystick and push the “ENTER” button or pushthe “TRIP” button for more than approximately1.5 seconds.

Maintenance itemsYou can set the engine oil and the tire rotationinterval.

To display the setting of the maintenance interval,select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” keyusing the joystick and push the “ENTER” button.

LHA0398 LHA0399 LHA0402



To set the maintenance interval, select the“Maintenance Schedule” key by using the joy-stick and push the joystick to right or left.

To reset the maintenance interval, select the “Re-set” key using the joystick and push the “EN-TER” button.

To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATIONautomatically when set trip distance is reached,select the “Display Maintenance Notifica-tion” key and push the “ENTER” button.

Tire pressure informationPressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s operation and theoutside temperature.

LHA0400 LHA0401 LHA0403



In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:

FLAT TIRE — very low tire air pressure.

WARNING

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel isreplaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated and the low tire pressure warningsystem will not function. Contact yourNISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tirereplacement and/or system resetting.

HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”BUTTON

The SETTING screen will appear when the“SETTING” button is pushed.

Display settings

The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear af-ter pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting“Display” key and pushing the “ENTER” but-ton.

Brightness/Contrast/Map Background:

To adjust the brightness and contrast of thescreen, select the “Brightness/contrast” key

and push the “ENTER” button. You can then usethe joystick to adjust the brightness to Darker orBrighter and the contrast to Lower or Higher. Forinformation on Map Background, please refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

Display Off:

To turn off the screen, push the “SETTING”button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-play Off” key. The indicator of the “DisplayOff” will turn to amber. When any mode button ispushed with the screen off, the screen turns onfor further operation. The screen will turn offautomatically 5 seconds after the operation isfinished on the map display in the Audio, HVAC(Heater and air conditioner), SETTING or VE-HICLE INFO modes.

To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING”button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-play Off” key, then set the screen to on bypushing the “ENTER” button.

Setting Audio or HVAC display:

Choose the “Audio” or “HVAC” (Heater and airconditioner) key to be displayed at the bottom, byusing the joystick. The audio or HVAC settingcondition will normally appear on the screen. Toreturn to the setting screen, push the “SET-TING” button or “PREV” button.

LHA0268



Vehicle electronic systemsThe VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screenwill appear when selecting the “Vehicle Elec-tronic Systems” key with the joystick and push-ing the “ENTER” button.

To set the various electronic systems operatingconditions, select the applicable item using thejoystick, and push the “ENTER” button. Theindicator light, box at left of selected item, alter-nately turns on and off each time the “ENTER”button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

LHA0382 LHA0381 LHA0261



Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle:

With this option ON, the driver’s seat automati-cally moves back and returns to the original po-sition for ease of exit and entry.

Remote unlock driver’s door first:

This option allows you to select which doors willunlock first during an unlocking operation:

Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors

Keyless remote response — horn:

This key allows you to change the horn chirpmode that occurs when pressing the LOCK orUNLOCK button on the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Keyless remote response — lights:

This key allows you to change the hazard indica-tor flash mode that occurs when pressing theLOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Auto re-lock time:

This key allows you to set the length of timebefore doors auto re-lock.

Sensitivity of automatic headlights:

This key allows you to set the sensitivity of theautomatic headlights:

● Lower- less sensitive, automatic headlightswill take longer to come on when the head-light sensor senses less ambient light.

● Higher- more sensitive, automatic head-lights will come on quicker when the head-light sensor senses less ambient light.

Automatic headlights off delay:

This key allows you to set the length of timebefore the automatic headlights turn off afterexiting the vehicle.

Speed dependent wiper:

This key allows you to turn on or turn off thedriving speed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion.

Return all settings to default:

When this key is selected and turned on usingthe “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE-HICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the defaultsettings.



System settingsLanguage/Unit

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear whenselecting the “Language/Unit” key and push-ing the “ENTER” button.

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGMetric — km, °C, L/100 km

You can select the language and unit using thejoystick and “ENTER” button.

Clock

Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and movethe joystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.

After completion of the setting, press the“PREV” button.

Setting daylight savings time:

Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjustthe clock to daylight savings time.

ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour.

OFF: The current time is displayed.

LHA0262 LHA0270 LHA0271



Adjusting the time to the GPS:

Select the “Auto Adjust” key.

The time will be reset to the GPS time.

Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.

The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear.

2. Select one of the following zones dependingon the current location.

● Pacific zone

● Mountain zone

● Central zone

● Eastern zone

● Atlantic zone

● Newfoundland zone

After selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS] screenwill appear.

LHA0272 LHA0273 LHA0274



The GPS time (manual time) corresponding tothe selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zonehas been set as the initial (default) setting.

Beep setting

With this option ON, a beep will sound if anyaudio button is pushed.

BUTTONTo change the display brightness, pushthe button. Pushing the button again willchange the display to DAY or NIGHT display.Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystickright or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the“PREV” button is pushed, the display will returnto the previous display.

Adjust air flow direction for the driver and pas-senger side s1 , center s2 , and rear passengers3 and s4 ventilators by moving the ventilatorslide and/or ventilator assemblies.

LHA0386

VENTILATORS



WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children, impaired adults,or pets alone in your vehicle. They couldaccidentally injure themselves or oth-ers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

● Positioning of the heater and/or airconditioner controls should not bedone while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

1. Fan speed control dial2. Air recirculation button3. Temperature control dial4. Air conditioner button5. Air flow control dial6. Rear window defroster switch7. Rear fan speed dial8. Rear mode control and temperature dial

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control dialThe air flow control dial allows you to select theair flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling (airconditioning).

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

LHA0407

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual)



— Air flows from center and sideventilators and the front and rearfloor outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the front andrear floor outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outletsand the front and rear flooroutlets.

— Air flows mainly from defrosteroutlets.

The air flow control dial also has intermediatepositions which allow the air flow to be distrib-uted between 2 of the icon positions on the airflow control dial.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air.

Air recirculation button

ON position:Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate air inside the vehicle. The indicator light onthe button will come on. ( will appearon the display, if so equipped.)

Push the button to the on position:

● when driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

OFF position:Push the air recirculation button again toturn air recirculation off. The indicator light onthe button will turn off. ( will appearon the display, if so equipped.) Outside air isdrawn into the passenger compartment and dis-tributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired (1 to 4) position and push thebutton to turn on the air conditioner. The indicatorlight on the button will come on. (A/C willappear on the display, if so equipped.) Pushthe button again to turn off the air condi-tioner. The indicator light on the button willgo off. (A/C OFF will appear on the display, if soequipped.)

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch

For more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window defrosterswitch” in the “Instruments and controls” sectionof this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Push the button to the OFF positionfor normal heating. The indicator light onthe button will go off. ( will ap-pear on the display, if so equipped.)

2. Turn the air flow control dial to theposition.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side andcenter ventilators.



1. Push the button to the OFF position.The indicator light on the button willgo off. ( will appear on the display, if soequipped.)



4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defoggingThis mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.




● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and thetemperature control lever to the full HOTposition.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,

the indicator light on the button willnot come on and A/C will not appear on thedisplay, if so equipped) if the outside tem-perature is more than 36°F (2°C). If in de-frost mode for more than one minute, the airconditioning system will continue to operateuntil the fan control dial is turned to OFF orthe vehicle is shut off, even if the air flowcontrol dial is turned to a position other thanthe position. This dehumidifies the airwhich helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off, al-lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-senger compartment to further improve thedefogging performance.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the sideand center vents and to the front and rear flooroutlets.





Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light on the button will notcome on and A/C will not appear on the dis-play, if so equipped) if the outside temperatureis more than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode formore than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the fancontrol dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle isshut off, even if the air flow control dial is turnedto a position other than the position.This dehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawn intothe passenger compartment to further improvethe defogging performance.



Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired (1 to 4) position, and push in thebutton to activate the air conditioner. When theair conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifyingfunctions are added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the OFF position.



4. Push the button. The indicator lighton the button will come on. (A/C willappear on the display, if so equipped.)


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe ON position. The indicator light onthe button will come on. ( willappear on the display, if so equipped.) Besure to return the to the OFF positionfor normal cooling The indicator light onthe button will go off. ( will ap-pear on the display, if so equipped.) You mayalso select MAX A/C for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heatingThis mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.




4. Push the button on. The indicatorlight on the button will come on. (A/Cwill appear on the display, if so equipped.)The air conditioning system will continue tooperate until the fan control dial is turned toOFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if the airflow control dial is turned to a position otherthan the position.


Operating tips● Keep the windows and sunroof (if so

equipped) closed while the air conditioner isin operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.



AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. For additional informationon heating and cooling see “Heating” on page4-13 and “Cooling” on page 4-15. The air re-circulation ( ) button should alwaysbe in the OFF position for heating anddefrosting.

LHA0390



LHA0391 LHA0392



LHA0393 LHA0394



LHA0395



LHA0396



1. Driver temperature control dial2. Fan control buttons and system OFF

button3. Rear window and front window de-

froster dial4. MODE button and AUTO button5. Passenger temperature control dial6. A/C ON/OFF button and air recircula-

tion button7. Rear control and fan speed dial8. Rear mode and temperature control dial

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

● Positioning of the heater and/or airconditioner controls should not bedone while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round asthe system automatically works to keep a con-stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will bedisplayed.)

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature. Driver andpassenger temperatures can be set inde-pendently.

● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

LHA0418

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)



● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/offare also controlled automatically.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging1. Turn the defroster control dial to the

left. The display will show the defrost icon.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of thewindows, push the manual fan controlbutton and set to the maximum posi-tion.

● As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, push the AUTO button to return to theauto mode.

● When the DEF control is activated,the air conditioner will automatically beturned on at outside temperatures above36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for more thanone minute, the air conditioning system willcontinue to operate until the fan control isturned OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even ifthe air flow mode control button is used toselect a position other than the posi-tion. This dehumidifies the air which helpsdefog the windshield. The air recirculatemode automatically turns off, allowing out-

side air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Push the fan control button up or downto manually control the fan speed.

Push the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push theAUTO button to return to automatic mode.

The air recirculation button will not be activatedwhen the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

Air flow control

Pushing the MODE button manually controls airflow and selects the air outlet to:

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster and footoutlets.

To turn system offPush and hold the fan down button until thesystem turns off.



REAR CONTROL BUTTONYou can adjust the climate control system for rearseat passengers using the buttons on the maincontrol panel. Front passengers can control therear functions by placing the controls on anysetting other than the “R”.

OPERATING TIPS● When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, air flow from the foot outletswill operate normally.

The sunload sensor s1 , located on the top centerof the instrument panel, helps the system main-tain a constant temperature. Do not put anythingon or around this sensor.

To operate the rear air conditioner, the enginemust be running and the front air conditionersystem must be on.

The rear seat air conditioner can be turned onand off from the front controls. If the rear seat fancontrol dial is set to (0), the air conditioner isturned off. If it is set to any of the fan speedpositions, air is discharged from the rear vents atthe corresponding speed. When the rear seat fancontrol dial is set to (R), the rear seat passengerscontrol their own fan speed.

The rear seat air conditioner only works when thefront seat air conditioner is operating.

LHA0356 LHA0387

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER



CONTROLS

Fan control dialThe fan control dial s1 turns the rear vent fan onand off, and controls fan speed.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial s2 allows rear pas-sengers to adjust the temperature and mode ofthe outlet air.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” section of thismanual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knobto turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio withthe engine not running, the key should be turnedto the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area, and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

LHA0310

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM



Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 - 30miles (40 - 48 km), with monaural (single chan-nel) FM having slightly more range than stereoFM. External influences may sometimes interferewith FM station reception even if the FM station iswithin 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distance betweenthe transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow aline-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the samecharacteristics as light. For example they willreflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter) static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed or thebattery has been replaced, the satellite radio maynot work properly. This is not a malfunction. Waitmore than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and

the vehicle outside of any metal or large buildingfor satellite radio to receive all of the necessarydata.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isselected unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed (retrofit unavailable withoutfactory satellite radio pre-wiring), and an XMT orSIRIUS™ satellite radio service subscription isactive.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.



AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high. Decrease thetemperature before use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

LHA0099



1. PRESET ABC button2. Display3. CD button4. CD eject button5. CD insert slot6. MENU button7. AUDIO button8. Station select buttons9. SEEK/TRACK button10. PWR/VOL control knob11. BAND select buttonFM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)PWR/VOL control knob

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,then push the PWR/VOL control knob. If youlisten to the radio with the engine not running,turn the key to the ACC position. The mode (radioor CD) that was playing immediately before thesystem was turned off resumes playing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.Pushing the PWR/VOL control knob again turnsthe system off.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right toincrease volume or to the left to decrease volume.

LHA0117



Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance

To adjust the audio levels for bass, treble, fader,and balance, push the AUDIO button and adjustthe level with the SEEK/TRACK button. Press theAUDIO button once for BASS (bass), twice forTREB (treble), 3 times for FAD (fader) and 4

times for BAL (balance). Once the audio level isset the display will return back to radio or CDdisplay mode after 7 seconds or the AUDIObutton can be pressed again within 7 seconds toset the next audio level. Pressing the AUDIObutton a fifth time will return the display back toradio or CD display mode.

Fader adjusts the sound level between the frontand rear speakers, balance adjusts the soundlevel between the right and left speakers.

Clock set

1. Press and hold the MENU button until itbeeps (longer than 2 seconds).

2. The hours will start flashing. PressSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjust thehours.

3. Press the MENU button until the radio beepsto switch to the minute adjustment.

4. The minutes will start flashing. PressSEEK/TRACK ( or ) to adjust the min-utes.

5. Press the MENU button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 7 seconds, or you may press the MENUbutton again to return to the regular clock display.

FM-AM radio operation

FM-AM band select

Push the button to change from AM to FMreception.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.

SEEK/manual/SCANtuning

When the button is pushed while the radiois playing, tuning mode is cycled between:

SEEK tuning → manual tuning → SCAN mode

“TUNE” and “SCAN” are shown in the display foreach mode. No icon is displayed for SEEK mode.

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned while driv-ing so full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

SEEK tuning

Push the SEEK/TRACK tuning button (or ) for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuningbegins from low to high frequencies or high tolow frequencies, depending on which button is

LHA0118



pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta-tion. If using the button, once the highestbroadcasting station is reached, the radio contin-ues in the SEEK mode at the lowest broadcastingstation. If using the button, once the lowestbroadcasting station is reached, the radio contin-ues in the SEEK mode at the highest broadcast-ing station.

Manual tuning

Use the and buttons for manualtuning. To move quickly through the channels,hold either of the tuning buttons down.

SCAN tuning

Push and hold the SEEK/TRACK tuning button( or ) for more than 1.5 seconds.

SCAN illuminates in the display window, and theradio station blinks. SCAN tuning begins fromlow to high frequencies or high to low frequen-cies, depending on which button is pressed.SCAN tuning stops at each broadcasting stationfor 5 seconds. When scanning, SCAN is solidand the radio station blinks. When temporarilystopped on a station, SCAN blinks and the sta-tion display is solid. Pushing the button againduring this 5 second period stops SCAN tuningand the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations

Each preset mode (A, B or C) has 6 presets,capable of storing any combination of AM and FMstations.

Press the PRESET ABC button to change be-tween the presets:

A→B→C

The radio displays icon A, B or C to indicatewhich set of presets is active.

To store a radio station in a preset:

1. Select the desired preset by pressing PRE-SET ABC.

2. Tune to the desired station.

3. Press the desired station select button formore than 3 seconds. For example, in theillustrations, ch2 is to be memorized. Theradio mutes when the select button ispushed.

4. When the indicator illuminates in the displayand the sound resumes, memorizing is com-plete.

5. Other station select buttons can be set inthe same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radiofuse opens, the radio memory is canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

LHA0119



Compact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,and carefully insert the compact disc into the slotwith the label side up. The compact disc is auto-matically pulled into the slot and starts to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CAUTION

Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

CD button

When the CD button is pushed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the compact disc starts to play.

Track up/down, FF/REV(rewind) buttons

Track up/down

When the button is pushed and releasedwhile the compact disc is playing, the selectionfollowing the present one starts to play from thebeginning. Push the button several times toskip several selections. Each time the button ispushed, the CD advances 1 additional selection.

The number appears in the display window.(When the last selection on the compact disc isskipped, the first selection is played.)

When the button is pushed and released, theselection being played returns to the beginning.Push the button several times to skip backseveral selections. Each time the button ispushed, the CD moves back 1 selection.

If the play pattern is in MIX mode when theor button is pushed the next selection will bechosen at random.

FF (Fast Forward)/REV (Reverse)

When the or button is pushed and heldwhile the compact disc is playing, the compactdisc plays at an increased speed while fast for-warding or rewinding. When the button is re-leased, the compact disc returns to normal playspeed.

MENU

When the button is pushed while the com-pact disc is playing, the play pattern changes asfollows:

RPT: The current selection is repeated.

MIX: Selections are played at random, not fol-lowing the sequence on the compact disc. The

same program may be repeated twice. If thebutton is pushed in the MIX mode, selections willbe chosen at random.

Blank (no symbol): All selections are playedrepeatedly in sequence.

When a new compact disc is inserted, theplay pattern automatically changes to ALL.

CD EJECT button

When the button is pushed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc ejects.

When the button is pushed while the com-pact disc is playing, the compact disc ejects andthe system turns off.

DISC indicator light

This light comes on when a compact discis loaded into the player.



1. SEEK/TRACK change button2. TUNE/REW/FF button3. PAUSE/MUTE button4. PROG/RPT button5. PRESET A-B-C select button

6. CD play button7. RADIO button8. AUX button9. REAR AV button10. speaker control button

11. LOAD button12. CD insert slot13. CD eject button14. POWER/VOLUME control knob15. Station and CD select buttons (1 - 6)16. Tuning and AUDIO control knob

(BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE and BAL-ANCE)

Type ALHA0384



1. SEEK/TRACK change button2. TUNE/REW/FF button3. Display4. PAUSE/MUTE button5. PROG/RPT button

6. H/M button (clock set buttons)7. PRESET A-B-C select button8. CD play button9. RADIO button10. AUX button

11. speaker control button12. REAR AV button13. LOAD button14. CD insert slot15. CD eject button16. POWER/VOLUME control knob17. Station and CD select buttons (1 - 6)18. Tuning and AUDIO control knob

(BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE and BAL-ANCE)

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC CHANGER (Type Aand B) (if so equipped)

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the RADIO button ispressed to access satellite radio stations unlessoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled (retrofit unavailable without factory satel-lite radio pre-wiring), and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active.

Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpush the POWER/VOLUME control knob while

Type BLHA0385



the system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)which was playing immediately before the systemwas turned off.

To turn the system off, press thePOWER/VOLUME control knob.

Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad-just the volume.

This vehicle has speed sensitive control volume(SSV) for audio. The audio volume changes asthe driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE,FADE, BALANCE and SSV):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode asfollows:

BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE→ SSV

To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade andBalance, press the AUDIO knob until the desiredmode appears in the display. Turn the Tuningknob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desiredlevel. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjustFader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts thesound level between the front and rear speakersand Balance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID orHIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

Clock set (type B only)

1. Press and hold the H button to advancehours.

2. Press and hold the M button to advanceminutes.

For setting the clock on type A audio systems see“Adjusting the time” on page 4-9.

Display CD text:

To change the text displayed while playing a CD,press the AUDIO knob until “Display Mode” ap-pears.

Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The textwill change as follows:

Track number ←→ Track title ←→ Disc title ←→Track number

Display satellite radio text (if so equipped):

To change the text displayed while listening tosatellite radio, press the AUDIO knob until “Dis-play Mode” appears.

Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The textwill change as follows:

Channel number ←→ Channel name ←→ Artist←→ Title ←→ Channel number

Pause/mute button:

To mute or pause the audio sound, push thePAUSE/MUTE button.

To release the mute or pause, push the buttonagain.

FM/AM/SAT radio operationFM/AM/SAT band select:

Pushing the RADIO button will change the bandas follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT (Satellite)

When the RADIO button is pushed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe POWER/VOLUME control knob is de-pressed to ON.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the RADIO button ispressed to access satellite radio stations unlessoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled (retrofit unavailable without factory satel-



lite radio pre-wiring), and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIObutton is pushed, the compact disc will automati-cally be turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned while driv-ing so full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

To manually tune the radio, push the TUNE button( or ) or turn the tuning knob to rightor left.

To move quickly through the channels, hold eitherthe or button down for more than1.5 seconds.

SEEK tuning:

Push the SEEK/TRACK button ( or )for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to lowor low to high frequencies and stop at the nextbroadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Push the or button for more than1.5 seconds to stop at each broadcasting stationfor 5 seconds. Pushing the button again duringthis 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning andthe radio will remain tuned to that station. Ifthe or button is not pushed within 5seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(Satellite-if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of AM or FMstations.

1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using thepreset select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any ofthe desired station memory buttons (1 - 6)until a beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Memorizing is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseblows, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band) and/orSAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad-cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in largecities, but many stations are now consideringbroadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Traffic reports about delays or construction.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.



Program type (PTY):

PTY can be used to search for a certain programtype. Certain areas have a limited number ofstations that transmit RDS. Many stations trans-mit call letters and frequencies only.

Searching or scanning by program type may yielda limited number of selections.

When PROG/RPT button is pressed for morethan 1.5 seconds during FM or SAT (if soequipped) mode, the PTY name of the currenttuned station is displayed. During this time if thePTY data code is zero or the data is unreadable,the display will show NONE.

To change the PTY:

1. Press the PROG/RPT button.

2. Press the TUNE button ( or ) tochose a specific program type. Refer to theillustration.

The display will show “SEEK, SCAN?”

SEEK tuning:

3. After selecting a program type, push theSEEK button ( or ) for less than1.5 seconds within 10 seconds. Tuning tothe PTY station will start. If you do not pushthe SEEK button within the 10 second pe-riod, the PTY mode will be canceled.

SCAN tuning:

4. Push the or button for morethan 1.5 seconds to scan the PTY namestations and stop at each broadcasting sta-tion for 5 seconds. Pushing the button againduring this 5 second period will stop SCANtuning and the radio will remain tuned to thatstation. If the or button is notpushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuningmoves to the next station.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc will be

LHA0275



guided automatically into the slot and start play-ing. To insert the disc, first push the LOAD button.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pushing thePOWER/VOLUME control knob will start thecompact disc.

LOAD button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the LOADbutton for less than 1.5 seconds. Select theloading slot by pushing the CD insert selectbutton (1 - 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push theLOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 - 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD button:

When the CD button is pushed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the compactdisc loaded with the radio playing, the radio willautomatically be turned off and the compact discwill start to play.

REW (Rewind), FF (FastForward):

When the (rewind) or (fast forward)button is pushed while a compact disc is playing,the compact disc will play while rewinding or fastforwarding . When the button is released, thecompact disc will return to normal play speed.

When the CD button is pushed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the compactdisc loaded with the tape or the radio playing, thetape or radio will automatically be turned off andthe compact disc will start to play.

SEEK/TRACK:

When the button is pushed for less than 1.5seconds while a compact disc is playing, thetrack being played returns to its beginning. Pushseveral times to skip back through tracks. Thecompact disc will go back the number of timesthe button is pushed.

When the button is pushed for less than 1.5seconds while the compact disc is playing, thenext track will start to play from its beginning.Push several times to skip through tracks. Thecompact disc will advance the number of times

the button is pushed. (When the last track on thecompact disc is skipped through, the first trackwill be played.)

When pushing the or button for morethan 1.5 seconds, each track will play for about10 seconds. To stop playing, pushthe button again.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, push aCD select button (1 - 6).

REPEAT (RPT):

When the PROG/RPT play button is pushedwhile the compact disc is played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISCRPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingwill be repeatedALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly



REAR AV:

Pushing the REAR AV button for less than 1.5seconds turns the rear seat audio controller on.REAR CONT ON will display. Pushing it againwill turn the rear seat audio controller off. REARCONT OFF will display. If the vehicle is notequipped with a rear seat audio controller, thedisplay will show “REAR AV N/A”.

If a DVD is loaded in the DVD entertainmentsystem (if so equipped), pushing the REAR AVbutton for more than 1.5 seconds will turn theDVD player on.

When the REAR AV button is pushed for morethan 1.5 seconds with a DVD loaded and anotheraudio source playing, the other source will auto-matically be turned off and the DVD will start toplay.

(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Push this button to turn the rear speakers off andheadphones on. Push this button again to turnrear seat speakers back on and headphones off.

CD EJECT:

Current disc:

● Press the slot number (1 - 6) for the desireddisc, then press the button. The com-pact disc will be ejected. If the disc is notremoved within 15 seconds, the disc willreload (except 3.1 in [8 cm] diameter com-pact discs).

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 15 seconds, or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pushed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc will ejectand the last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 - 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer.

AUX jack (if so equipped)

The AUX jack s1 is located below the air condi-tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack acceptsany standard analog audio input such as from aportable cassette tape player, MP3 player orlaptop computers.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX jack.

LHA0408



CD CARE AND CLEANING● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the centerto the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Donot wipe the disc using a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

1. Volume control switch2. MODE select switch3. POWER on/off switch4. Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ONposition, push the POWER switch to turn theaudio system on or off.

MODE select switchPush the mode select switch to change the modein the following sequence: AM, FM, SAT and CD.

Volume control switchPush the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for lessthan 1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) formore than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ-ous radio station.

FF, REW:

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent program or skip to the next program.Push several times to skip back or skip throughprograms.

LHA0049 LHA0269



To stop the FF or REW function, press theor button for less than 1.5 seconds again.

When playing a CD in the CD changer (if soequipped), push the tuning switch (or ) for more than 1.5 seconds to changebetween discs when multiple CDs are loaded.

1. VOL (volume) control button2. MODE select button3. speaker control button4. NEXT button5. SEEK button6. Headphone jacks

7. Infrared headphone transmitter lens*

*Red transmitters will be visible wheninfrared headphones are on.

LHA0322



REAR AUDIO CONTROLS (if soequipped)

Push the REAR AV button on the front radiocontrol panel to turn the rear controls on. Pushthe button again to turn rear controls off.

The headphones symbol illuminates on the frontdisplay when the rear audio controls are on. Twoheadphone jacks are provided so two rear seatpassengers may listen to the audio system pri-vately.

The rear volume controls can only increase thevolume to the level at which the front radio volumecontrol is set.

One infrared headphone is included if the vehicleis equipped with the DVD entertainment system.Most portable radio headphones work with therear audio controls.

For vehicles equipped with the FM/AM/SAT radiowith compact disc player, if the rear passengersturn off the rear speakers and are using head-phones they may choose to listen to a differentmedia than the front passengers. The rear pas-sengers can listen to the radio while the frontpassengers can listen to the same thing, a CD orSAT radio.

VOL (volume) button:

The VOL button allows the rear passengers toadjust the headphone volume level.

(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Push this button to turn the rear speakers off andheadphones on. Push this button again to turnrear seat speakers back on and headphones off.

MODE button:

The MODE button allows the rear passengers tochange between AM, FM, CD, DVD and AUX.The media options are listed on the face plate ofthe rear audio controls. When a source of mediais selected, the media label will be illuminated.

SEEK button:

In AM or FM mode the SEEK button allows therear seat passengers to find the next radio stationup or down the station band frequency.

In CD mode the SEEK button allows the rearpassengers to find the next or previous selectionon the CD.

NEXT button:

When the NEXT button is pushed while in AM orFM mode, the radio will change to the next preset.

The NEXT button does not function while in SATradio mode or when playing a DVD or CD.

ANTENNA

Window antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rearpassenger and driver side windows.

CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near therear driver or passenger side windowglass or attach any metal parts to it. Thismay cause poor reception or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the reardriver or passenger side window, becareful not to scratch or damage thewindow antenna. Lightly wipe along theantenna with a dampened soft cloth.



WARNING

● The Mobile Entertainment System isdesigned for rear seat passenger view-ing only.

● The driver must not attempt to operatethe Mobile Entertainment System whilethe vehicle is in motion so that full at-tention may be given to vehicleoperation.

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass breaks, do nottouch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaningthe Mobile Entertainment System com-ponents. Do not use solvents or clean-ing solutions.

● Do not attempt to use the system inextreme temperature conditions [below-4°F (-20°C) or above 158°F (70°C)].

● To avoid draining the vehicle battery, donot operate the system more than 15minutes without starting the engine.

LHA0389

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)



1. EJECT button2. DVD slot3. ENTER button4. POWER on/off button5. MODE button6. Input jacks7. STOP button8. PLAY/PAUSE button9. MENU button10. DISPLAY button11. NAVIGATION keys

DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYERCONTROLS

1. POWER button2. STOP button3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVI-

OUS TRACK/CHAPTER button4. TITLE button5. ENTER button

LHA0316

LHA0317



6. DISPLAY button7. MODE button8. SUBTITLE button9. AUDIO button10. ANGLE button11. CLEAR button12. PAUSE button13. PLAY button14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE

button15. MENU button16. NAVIGATION keys17. BACK button18. NUMERIC KEYPADREMOTE CONTROL FLIP-DOWN SCREEN

The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con-trol receiver s1 located at the bottom of thescreen.

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass breaks, do nottouch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

● The screen rotates down to view and upinto the housing to store when not inuse. Ensure that the screen is latchedsecurely into the housing when stored.

LHA0315



Headphones

Power ON/OFF:

Push the power button to turn the headphoneson or off.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol-ume.

The headphones will automatically be turned offin 30 seconds if there is no sound during thatperiod. To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, keep the power suppy turned off whennot in use.

SAA0720 SAA0721



NOTE:

For optimum infrared headphone perfor-mance, increase the volume on the rearseat controller to the maximum level andadjust the infrared headphone volume us-ing the volume control on the headphones.Using a lower volume setting on the rearseat controller can cause static noise in theinfrared headphones.

PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC(DVD)

CAUTION

● Only operate the DVD while the vehicleengine is running. Operating the DVDfor extended periods of time with theengine OFF can discharge the vehiclebattery.

● Do not allow the system to get wet.Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-uids may cause the system tomalfunction.

● The driver must not attempt to wear theheadphones while the vehicle is in mo-tion so that full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

● While playing video CD media, this DVDplayer does not guarantee completefunctionality of all video CD formats.

With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-pendently of the front seat.

Press the REAR AV button located on the frontcontrols for more than 1.5 seconds to hear thesound of the DVD player through the speakers.

Pushing the button on the front controlsturns the rear speakers on and off.

It is possible to operate the DVD player by remotecontrol.

Headphones are a wireless type and no cablesare necessary. You can use them in almost all theranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to usethe headphones in the front seat.)

POWER on/off button:

With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or ONposition, push the POWER button to turn theDVD player on or off.

Insert the DVD into the slot with the label sidefacing up. The DVD will be guided automaticallyinto the slot.

If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, theDVD player will automatically turn on.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into theslot. This could damage the player.

MODE select button:

Push the Mode button to select Audio/Videosource between DVD and AUX input (input jackson the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =Video input).

The display will show the “AUX” in the upper leftcorner of the display for 4 seconds once theMode is changed to AUX.

To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary inputjacks” in this section.

or PLAY:

When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player orthe PLAY button on the remote control is pushed,the player will play.

In play mode, the display will briefly showon the upper left corner of the display.



FF (Fast Forward), REW(Remote control only):

Push FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but-tons to carry out the fast forward or fast reversepresentation at 5 times normal play speed.

Push FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but-tons again or PLAY button to resume the normalplay speed.

NEXT CHAPTER/PREVIOUS CHAPTER(Remote control only):

When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button ispushed while the DVD is being played, the pro-gram next to the present one will start to play fromits beginning. Push several times to skip throughprograms. The DVD will advance the number oftimes the button is pushed. Whenthe (PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button ispushed, the program being played returns to itsbeginning. Push several times to skip backthrough programs. The DVD will go back thenumber of times the button is pushed.

or PAUSE:

When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player orthe PAUSE button on the remote control ispushed, the player will pause playing of the me-dia. In pause mode, the player will show on

the upper left corner of the display until the playeris changed to another mode.

STOP:

Push the STOP button once to stop playing themedia. The display will show in the upperleft corner of the display for 4 seconds, and thelast disc position will be stored. When the PLAYbutton is pushed again, it will resume at thestored disc track and time position.

If the STOP button is pushed again when theplayer is already in Stop mode, it will reinitializethe pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect itwill ignore the last stored disc position and uponreceipt of the next play message it will begin atthe Title Menu, or at “the beginning of the disc”.

EJECT:

When the EJECT button is pushed with the DVDloaded, it will be ejected.

The display will show the EJECT symbol inthe upper left corner of the display for 4 secondsonce the EJECT button is pushed.

If the DVD is not loaded, the display will show“NO DISC”.

If the DVD comes out and is not removed within25 seconds, it will be pulled back into the slot toprotect it.

DISPLAY:

If the DISPLAY control is pushed for less than 2seconds, the display menu will appear on thescreen.

● The display menu will remain on the screenfor 10 seconds if no subsequent controlactivations occur.

● Use NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate withinthe display menu, and use ENTER to selectthe item.

● Holding the DISPLAY control on the face-plate for longer than approximately 2 sec-onds while in the display menu will reset thedisplay characteristics to their nominal val-ues. (Faceplate feature only)

If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate ispushed for more than 2 seconds, the mediatrack/time information will be displayed along thebottom of the display. Pushing the DISPLAY con-trol for more than 2 seconds will remove themedia track/time information from the display.(Faceplate feature only)

NAVIGATION KEYS:

If media is in PLAY mode, activation of the NAVI-GATION KEYS (Up, Down, Left, and Right) willperform the following functions: nextchapter/track, previous chapter/track, fast re-



verse and fast forward, and the display willshow , , and respec-tively in the upper left corner of the display for 4seconds. (Faceplate feature only)

If media is in PAUSE mode, activation of theNAVIGATION KEYS (Up, Down and Right) willperform the following functions: nextchapter/track, previous chapter/track and slowforward, and the display will show ,and a forward arrow symbol respectively in theupper left corner of the display for 4 seconds.(Faceplate feature only)

If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,Down, Left, and Right within the menu.

If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATIONKEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,and Right within the menu.

ENTER:

In MENU mode, push the ENTER button to selectMENU items.

In the display menu, push the ENTER button toselect items for modification, as per the on-screen instructions.

MENU:

If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENUbutton is pressed, the DVD menu will appear on

the screen. Use Navigation Keys to navigatewithin the menu, and use ENTER to select theitem.

Push the MENU button again to return to PLAYmode.

TITLE (Remote control only):

Push TITLE button to return the DVD media to the“title” of the DVD.

Push TITLE button again to return to the previousstop point and play.

BACK (Remote control only):

Push the BACK button to exit the current activemenu and return to the previous menu.

SUBTITLE (Remote control only):

Push the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitleselection menu.

Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cyclethrough each available subtitle.

AUDIO (Remote control only):

Push the AUDIO button to call up audio menu.

Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cyclethrough each available audio track.

ANGLE (Remote control only):

Push the ANGLE button to call up camera anglemenu.

Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cyclethrough each available angle.

CLEAR (Remote control only):

Push the CLEAR button to clear all numeric in-puts, if actuated prior to expiration of the3-second timer.

NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10) (Remotecontrol only):

Push the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly accessdisc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting theirnumeric value.

The “≥10” button input numbers greater than orequal to 10, allowing up three digits to be inputfor selecting chapter/title/track number.

The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons willcontinuously shift the previously input number tothe “left”.

The chapter/title/track number will be automati-cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.



The operator can cancel the inputchapter/title/track number by actuating theCLEAR control prior to the expiration of the3-second timer.

These functions can be used only for the DVDdiscs which correspond to them.

Auxiliary input jacks

The auxiliary input jacks are located on the controlpanel. Compatible devices such as video gamescamcorders and portable video players can beconnected to the auxiliary jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-tion purposes.

● Yellow - video input

● White - left channel audio input

● Red - right channel audio input

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean thesurfaces of your NISSAN mobile entertainmentsystem. (DVD player face, screen, remote con-trol, etc.)

CAUTION

● Do not use any solvents or cleaningsolutions when cleaning the videosystem.

● Do not use excessive force on the moni-tor screen.

● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-tor screen as it may become dirty ordamaged.

● Do not attempt to use the system inextreme temperature conditions [below-4°F (-20°C) or above 158°F (70°C)].

● Do not attempt to operate the system inextreme humidity conditions (less than10% or more than 75%).

HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD

CAUTION

● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional recordcleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-tended for industrial use.

LHA0049



● A new disc may be rough on its innerand outer edges. Remove the roughedges using the side of a pen or pencilas illustrated.

● Never attempt to use a DVD that hasbeen cracked, deformed, or repairedusing adhesive. Doing so may causedamage to the equipment.

● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may notbe read properly.

● Do not write, draw or attach anything on anyside of the DVD.

● Do not store the DVD in locations with directsunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.

● Always place discs in the storage case whenthey are not being used.

● Do not put on any sticker or write anythingon either surface of the DVD.

Remote control and headphones bat-tery replacement

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid.

2. Replace batteries with new ones.

● Size AA (remote control)

● Size AAA (headphones)

Make sure that the and ends onthe batteries match the markings inside thecompartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement close the lid se-curely.

● If you will not be using the remote control forlong periods of time, remove the batteries.

● Replacement of the batteries is neededwhen the remote control only functions atextremely close distances to the DVD playeror not at all.

● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.

● An improperly disposed battery can harmthe environment. Always confirm local regu-lations for battery disposal.

LHA0318 SAA0723



● When changing batteries, do not let dust oroil get on the remote control and head-phones.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the manufacturer compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. This device complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of thedevice.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingcautions, otherwise the new equipment may ad-versely affect the MFI (Multiport Fuel Injection)system and other electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the Engine Control Module(ECM).

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the Multiport FuelInjection harness. Do not route the an-tenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO



5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Low tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Engine protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29


WARNING



EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the back door and rear vent win-dows closed while driving, otherwiseexhaust gases could be drawn into thepassenger compartment. If you mustdrive with the back door or rear ventwindows open, follow theseprecautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the back door or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving


CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROADDRIVING PRECAUTIONSUtility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-ger cars to make them capable of performing in avariety of on-pavement and off-road applications.This gives them a higher center of gravity thanordinary cars. An advantage of higher groundclearance is a better view of the road, allowingyou to anticipate problems. However, they are notdesigned for cornering at the same speeds asconventional two-wheel drive vehicles any morethan low-slung sports cars are designed to per-form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If atall possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. Aswith other vehicles of this type, failure to operatethis vehicle correctly may result in loss of controlor vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read the driving safety precautionslater in this section.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGSYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with the low tire pres-sure warning system, which displays pressure ofall tires (except the spare tire) on the displayscreen (if so equipped) by sending a signal froma sensor that is installed in each wheel.

The low tire pressure warning system will activateonly when the vehicle is driven at speeds above20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, this system may notdetect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for ex-ample a flat tire while driving).

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s operation and theoutside temperature. Low outside temperaturecan lower the temperature of the air inside the tirewhich can cause a lower tire inflation pressure.This may cause the low tire pressure warninglight to illuminate.

If the warning light illuminates in low ambienttemperature as described above, check the tirepressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pressure shownon the Tire and Loading Information label to turnthe low tire pressure warning light OFF.

Frequently check the tire pressure informationdisplay on the display screen (if so equipped) andadjust pressure of each tire properly. (The order

Starting and driving 5-3


of the tire pressure figures displayed on thescreen does not correspond with the actual orderof the tire position.) See “Tire pressure informa-tion” in the “Display screen, heater, air condi-tioner and audio systems” section for tire pres-sure monitor.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with very low tirepressure (lower than 28 psi, 193 kPa), the lowtire pressure warning light comes on and thechime sounds for about 10 seconds.

For additional information regarding the abovewarning, see “Warning/indicator lights and au-dible reminders” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightflashes while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section forchanging a flat tire.)


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and thelow tire pressure warning system will notfunction properly.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the manufacturer compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interface, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired op-eration of the device.



AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As withany vehicle, loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects, orcause the vehicle to roll over, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, andavoid driving when tired. Never drive when underthe influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs which maycause drowsiness). Always wear your seat beltas outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts andsupplemental air bags” section of this manual,and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, anunbelted or improperly belted person issignificantly more likely to be injured orkilled than a person wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal andoff-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed forleisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-hicle.

Remember that two-wheel drive models are lesscapable than four-wheel drive models for roughroad driving and extrication when stuck in deepsnow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

● Drive carefully when off the road andavoid dangerous areas. Every personwho drives or rides in this vehicleshould be seated with their seat beltfastened. This will keep you and yourpassengers in position when drivingover rough terrain.

● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-stead drive either straight up or straightdown the slopes. Off-road vehicles cantip over sideways much more easilythan they can forward or backward.



● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.If you drive up them, you may stall. Ifyou drive down them, you may not beable to control your speed. If you driveacross them, you may roll over.

● Do not shift gears while driving ondownhill grades as this could causeloss of control of the vehicle.

● Stay alert when driving to the top of ahill. At the top there could be a drop-offor other hazard that could cause anaccident.

● If your engine stalls or you cannot makeit to the top of a steep hill, never at-tempt to turn around. Your vehiclecould tip or roll over. Always backstraight down in R (Reverse) gear. Neverback down in N (Neutral), using only thebrake, as this could cause loss ofcontrol.

● Heavy braking going down a hill couldcause your brakes to overheat and fade,resulting in loss of control and an acci-dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a lowgear to control your speed.

● Unsecured cargo can be thrown aroundwhen driving over rough terrain. Prop-erly secure all cargo so it will not bethrown forward and cause injury to youor your passengers.

● To avoid raising the center of gravityexcessively, do not exceed the ratedcapacity of the roof rack and evenlydistribute the load. Secure heavy loadsin the cargo area as far forward and aslow as possible. Do not equip the ve-hicle with tires larger than specified inthis manual. This could cause your ve-hicle to roll over.

● Do not grip the inside or spokes of thesteering wheel when driving off-road.The steering wheel could move sud-denly and injure your hands. Insteaddrive with your fingers and thumbs onthe outside of the rim.

● Before operating the vehicle, ensurethat the driver and all passengers havetheir seat belts fastened.

● Lower your speed when encounteringstrong crosswinds. With a higher centerof gravity, your NISSAN is more af-fected by strong side winds. Slowerspeeds ensure better vehicle control.

● Do not drive beyond the performancecapablity of the tires, even with 4WDengaged.

● Accelerating quickly, sharp steeringmaneuvers or sudden braking maycause loss of control.

● If at all possible, avoid sharp turningmaneuvers, particularly at high speeds.Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehiclehas a higher center of gravity than atwo-wheel drive vehicle. The vehicle isnot designed for cornering at the samespeeds as conventional two-wheeldrive vehicles. Failure to operate thisvehicle correctly could result in loss ofcontrol and/or a rollover accident.

● Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,or radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Install tire chains on the rearwheels when driving on slippery roadsand drive carefully.

● Be sure to check the brakes immedi-ately after driving in mud or water. See“Brake system” later in this section for“Wet brakes”.



● Avoid parking your vehicle on steephills. If you get out of the vehicle and itrolls forward, backward or sideways,you could be injured.

● Whenever you drive off-road throughsand, mud or water as deep as thewheel hub, more frequent maintenancemay be required. See “Periodic mainte-nance” in the “NISSAN Service andMaintenance Guide.”

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot beturned to LOCK position and removed until theshift selector lever is moved to the P (Park) posi-tion.

When removing the key from the ignition, makesure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)position.

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)position, the key cannot be move to the LOCKposition.

When the key cannot be turned to the LOCKposition, proceed as follows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ONposition.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannotmoved out of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFFposition or if the key is removed from the switch.

The shift selector lever can be moved if theignition switch is in the ACC position. Thisallows the vehicle to be moved if the bat-tery is discharged. The shift selector levercan also be moved if the ignition switch isin the ON position and the foot brake pedalis depressed.

There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ACC positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.When the ignition is in the OFF position,the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

WSD0041

IGNITION SWITCH



To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM (NVIS)The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS)will not allow the engine to start without the use ofthe registered NVIS key.

If the engine fails to start using the registeredNVIS key, it may be due to interference caused byanother NVIS key, an automated toll road deviceor automated payment device on the key ring.Restart the engine using the following proce-dures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition and wait approximately 5 seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered NVIS key.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,NISSAN recommends placing the registeredNVIS key on a separate key ring to avoid interfer-ence from other devices.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid asfrequently as possible, or at least wheneveryou refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe key is turned to the ON (3) position. See“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE



1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park) and into any ofthe other gear positions if the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position or ifthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector lever is in any of thedriving positions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionkey to START. Release the key when theengine starts. If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition key to START. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running fora minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting itoff. Starting and stopping the engine over ashort period of time may make the vehiclemore difficult to start.

ENGINE PROTECTION MODE

The engine has an engine protection mode toreduce the chance of damage if the coolant tem-perature becomes too high (for example, whenclimbing steep grades in high temperature withheavy loads, such as when towing a trailer).When the engine temperature reaches a certainlevel:

● The engine coolant temperature gauge willmove toward the H position.

● Engine power may be reduced.

● The air conditioning cooling function may beautomatically turned OFF for a short time(the blower will continue to operate).

Engine power and, under some conditions, ve-hicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can becontrolled with the accelerator pedal, but thevehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed.The transmission will downshift or upshift as itreaches prescribed shift points. You can alsoshift manually.

As driving conditions change and engine coolanttemperature is reduced, vehicle speed can beincreased using the accelerator pedal, and airconditioning cooling function will automaticallybe turned back ON.

If:

STARTING THE ENGINE DRIVING THE VEHICLE



1. The engine coolant temperature is not re-duced.

2. The air conditioning cooling function doesnot turn back ON.

3. The engine oil pressure warning/enginecoolant temperature high indicator il-luminates, this may indicate a malfunction.Move the vehicle off the road in a safe areaand allow the engine to cool. If after check-ing the oil and coolant, the remainson, do not continue to drive and call aNISSAN dealer.

The Malfunction indicator lamp may also comeON. If only it remains on, you do not need to haveyour vehicle towed, but have it inspected soon bya NISSAN dealer. See “Malfunction indicatorlight” in the “Warning and indicator lights”sectionof this manual.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.Pull to the side of the road to a safe area.Allow the engine to cool and return tonormal operation. See “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), or L (Low). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal until shifting iscompleted. Failure to do so could causeyou to lose control and have anaccident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

CAUTION

● When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrake should be used for this purpose.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to produce maximumpower and smooth operation.



The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before attempting to movethe shift selector lever out of the P (Park)position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed sothe foot brake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to any driveposition while the ignition switch is in theON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be movedout of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turnedto the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if thekey is removed.

To move the selector lever:

: Shift while depressing the brake pedal

: Shift without depressing brake pedal

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector lever out of theP (Park) position.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position forany reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), orany D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turnedto the LOCK position and be removed from theignition switch. Move the selector lever to the P(Park) position, then the key can be turned toLOCK.WSD0098



P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine. Make surethe vehicle is completely stopped. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the se-lector lever from N (Neutral) or any driveposition to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakefirst, then move the shift selector lever into the P(Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure thevehicle is completely stopped before selectingthe R (Reverse) position. The brake pedalmust be depressed to move the selectorlever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any driveposition to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

4 (Fourth gear):

Use this position for driving up and down longslopes where engine braking would be advanta-geous.

Do not downshift into the 4 position at speedsover the following and do not exceed the follow-ing speeds in the 4 position.

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

3 (Third gear):

Use this position for driving up and down longslopes where engine braking would be advanta-geous.

2 (Second gear):

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-ing on downhill grades.


2WD and AUTO:

71 MPH (115 km/h) w/o tow mode

62 MPH (100 km/h) w/tow mode

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

1 (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,or for maximum engine braking on steep downhillgrades.




2WD and AUTO:



4H:



4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector levermay not be moved from the P (Park) position evenwith the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shiftlock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will belocked unless the ignition switch is turned to theON position. This allows the vehicle to be movedif the battery is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu-tral) position while holding down the shiftlock release.

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock thesteering wheel. Now the vehicle may bemoved to the desired location.

If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out ofP (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-matic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

LSD0090



Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, please notethat the transmission will be locked in any of theforward gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. This will occureven if all electrical circuits are functioningproperly. In this case, turn the ignition keyOFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn thekey back to the ON position. The vehicleshould return to its normal operating con-dition. If it does not return to its normaloperating condition, have a NISSAN dealercheck the transmission and repair it if nec-essary.

WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedalagain and it will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

LSD0091

PARKING BRAKE



1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. ON/OFF switch4. CANCEL switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control main switch off and have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control main switch is turned ONwhile pushing the ACCEL/RES,COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (locatedon the steering wheel). To properly set thecruise control system, use the following pro-cedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 30 - 90 MPH (48 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the mainswitch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISEindicator light and SET indicator light in theinstrument panel go out.

LSD0092

CRUISE CONTROL



The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake pedal while pushingthe ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.The preset speed is deleted from memory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you move the shift selector lever to N (Neu-tral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the RES/ACCEL switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the RES/ACCEL switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the RES/ACCEL switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 30 MPH (48 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE



● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.Improper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use 4H or 4L position only whennecessary. Four-wheel drive operation low-ers fuel economy.

CAUTION

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surfaceroads:

● in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

● in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,move the automatic transmission shiftselector lever to the N position andshift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.

Have your vehicle checked by aNISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTINGPROCEDURESAll mode 4WD system provides 4 positions(AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can selectthe desired drive mode according to the drivingconditions.

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE(4WD)



4WD ShiftSwitch Position

WheelsDriven

Indicator Light

Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure4WD shift Transfer 4LO

position

AUTO

Rear wheelsor 4 wheels For driving on paved or slippery roads

Move the 4WD switch.2WD <—> AUTO <—> 4H4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift positionengaged.IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION SELECT LEVER TO THE N POSITIONIN THIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERATIONWHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.

2WD

Rear wheels For driving on dry, paved roads (Economydrive) or state dynamometer I/M testing

4H

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-coveredroads

Neutral

*1May blink

Neutral disengages the automatic transmis-sion mechanical parking lock, which will al-low the vehicle to roll. Do not leave thetransfer shift position in Neutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.2. Move the automatic transmission selector lever to the

N position.3. Push the 4WD shift switch and move it to 4LO or

4H.YOU CANNOT MOVE THE TRANSFER 4WD SHIFTSWITCH BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H)UN-LESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE ANDMOVED THE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SHIFT LE-VER TO NEUTRAL. *3

4LO 4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum power and tractionis required (for example: on steep grades orrocky, sandy, muddy roads)

*1: The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink. Stop the vehicle. Be sure to shift the 4WD shift switch after the automatic transmission lever has been shifted to the N position. If theindicator light keeps blinking after the 4WD shift procedure in the previous page, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while. Then the light will turn on or off.• Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO. Otherwise gears may grind, damaging the drive system.*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO positionindicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO.



The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used toselect either 2WD or 4WD depending on thedriving conditions. There are four types of drivemodes available, AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls thetransfer case operation. Rotate the switch tomove between each mode, 2WD, AUTO, 4H and4LO.

You must push the switch in to select 4LO,and the vehicle MUST be stationary and theautomatic transmission selector lever inthe N position when changing into or out of4LO.

WARNING

When parking, apply the parking brakebefore stopping the engine and make surethat the 4WD shift indicator light is on andthe ATP warning light goes off. Otherwise,the vehicle could unexpectedly move evenif the automatic transmission is in the Pposition.

CAUTION

● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

● The 4H position provides greater powerand traction. Avoid excessive speed, asit will cause increased fuel consump-tion and higher oil temperatures, andcould damage drivetrain components.Speeds over 62.5 MPH (100 km/h) in 4His not recommend.

● The 4LO position provides maximumpower and traction. Avoid raising ve-hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-mum speed is approximately 31 MPH(50 km/h).

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4Hposition. Do not move the 4WD shiftswitch when making a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-tween 2WD, AUTO and 4H) while drivingon steep downhill grades. Use the en-gine brake and low automatic transmis-sion gears (D1 or D2) for enginebraking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) with therear wheels spinning.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dryhard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may causeunnecessary noise and tire wear.NISSAN recommends driving in the2WD or AUTO position under theseconditions.

● The 4WD transfer case may not beshifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-bient temperatures and the transfer4LO position indicator light may blinkeven when the 4WD shift switch isshifted. After driving for a while you canchange the 4WD transfer case between4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

● Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO, 4H or4LO.

● Drive carefully according to the road surfaceconditions.

When the vehicle is stuck,

● Place stones or wooden blocks under thetires to free the vehicle.

● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.



● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeatforward and backward movement to in-crease the movement.

● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire chainsmay be effective.

CAUTION

● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tireswill sink deep into the mud, making itdifficult to free the vehicle.

● Avoid shifting gears with the enginerunning at high speeds as this maycause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations ● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the2WD, AUTO, 4H or 4LO position, depend-ing on driving conditions.

● With the switch set to the AUTO position,distribution of torque to the front and rearwheels changes automatically, dependingon road conditions encountered [ratio; 0 :100 (2WD) → 50 : 50 (4WD)]. This resultsin improved driving stability.

● If the 4WD shift switch is operatedwhile making a turn, accelerating ordecelerating or if the key switch isturned off while in the AUTO, 4H or

4LO, you may feel a jerk. This is notabnormal.

● When the vehicle is stopped after mak-ing a turn, you may feel a slight joltafter the selector lever is shifted to N orP. This occurs because the transferclutch is released and not because of amalfunction.

CAUTION

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4Hposition. Do not move the 4WD shiftswitch when making a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch whiledriving on steep downhill grades. Usethe engine brake and low automatictransmission gears (D1 or D2) for en-gine braking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switchwith the rear wheels spinning.

● Before placing the 4WD shift switch inthe 4H position from 2WD or AUTO,ensure the vehicle speed is less than62.5 MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do socan damage the 4WD system.

● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

LSD0093



● Engine idling speed is high while warm-ing up the engine. Be especially carefulwhen starting or driving on slippery sur-faces with the 4WD shift switch set inAUTO.

4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in theodometer display.

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator light will illuminate the position selected bythe 4WD shift switch.

● The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode tothe other. When the shifting is com-pleted, the 4WD shift indicator lightwill come on. If the indicator light does

not come on immediately, make surethe area around the vehicle is safe, anddrive the vehicle straight, accelerate ordecelerate or move the vehicle in re-verse, then shift the 4WD shift switch.

● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the4WD indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

● When the 4WD shift switch is turned tothe AUTO position at low ambient tem-peratures, the 4WD shift indicator lightmay show 4H. If this happens, all fourwheels are driven as torque distributionis in the 4H position. Be careful as thevehicle may become difficult to turn.When the vehicle is driven, the 4WDshift indicator light should change toAUTO.

● If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-tion changes to 2WD when the 4WDshift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4Hposition at low ambient temperatures,the 2WD mode may be being engageddue to malfunctioning drive system. Ifthe indicator does not return to normaland the 4WD warning light comes on,have the system checked by the nearestNISSAN dealer.

LSD0094



4WD warning light

Warning light Comes on or blinkswhen:

Comes onThere is a malfunc-tion in the 4–wheel

drive system

Blinks rapidlyThe transfer caseoil temperaturerises abnormally

Blinks slowlyThe difference inwheel rotation is

large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.

The 4WD warning light comes on when the keyswitch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after theengine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD systemwhen the key switch is ON, the warning light willeither remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WDshift indicator light goes out.

High-temperature transfer case oil makes thewarning light blink rapidly (about twice per sec-ond). If the warning light blinks rapidly duringoperation, stop the vehicle in a safe place imme-diately. Then if the light goes off after a while, youcan continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of frontand rear wheels will make the warning light blinkslowly (about once per two seconds). Changethe 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drivefast.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksslowly during operation or rapidly afterstopping the vehicle for a while, haveyour vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.

● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is notrecommended when the 4WD warninglight turns on.

● When the warning light comes on, the2WD mode may be engaged even if the4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H. Beespecially careful when driving. If corre-sponding parts are malfunctioning, the4WD mode will not be engaged even ifthe 4WD shift switch is shifted.

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surfaceroads:

● in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the4WD shift switch to 2WD.

● in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,move the automatic transmissionshift selector lever to the N positionwith the brake pedal depressed, andshift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.

● If the warning light is still on after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

● The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warninglight blinking rapidly.



WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shift

lever has been pushed as far forward asit can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: sA

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: sB

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: sC

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS



The power assisted steering is designed to use ahydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assiststeering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will bemuch harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrake linings and pads faster, and reduce gasmileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake bedding

The parking brake shoes must be “bedded down”whenever the stopping effect of the parkingbrake is weakened or whenever the parking brakeshoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in orderto assure the best brake performance.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM



This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes sothe wheels do not lock when braking abruptly orwhen braking on slippery surfaces. The systemdetects the rotation speed at each wheel andvaries the brake fluid pressure to prevent eachwheel from locking and sliding. By preventingwheel lockup, the system helps the driver main-tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv-ing and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the systemDepress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Normal operationThe anti-lock brake system does not operate atspeeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (Thespeeds vary according to road conditions.)

When driving, the anti-lock brake system con-trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak-

ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road.Thus, difficult steering and swerving of the ve-hicle due to locked wheels is minimized. Thesystem detects the wheel rotation rate and elec-tronically controls the pressure applied to eachbrake. Slight vibration on the brake pedal accom-panied by noise usually occurs while the ABSsystem is operating. Such vibration and noiseencountered during abrupt braking is not a prob-lem, but indicates that the system is functioningproperly. However, the pulsation may indicatethat road conditions are hazardous and extra careis required while driving.

Self-test feature

The anti-lock brake system consists of electronicsensors and hydraulic solenoids controlled by acomputer. The computer has a built-in diagnosticfeature that tests the system each time you startthe engine and move the vehicle at a low speed inforward or reverse. When the self-test occurs,you may hear a ‘‘clunk’’ noise and/or feel a pulsa-tion in the brake pedal. This is normal and is notan indication of any malfunction. If the computersenses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lockbrake system off and turns on the ABS brakewarning light on the instrument panel. The brakesystem then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the anti-lock function will not operate, but the standardvehicle brake system will continue to operatenormally. The ABS brake warning light will thencome on.

If the light comes on during the self-test or whiledriving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer forrepair.

WARNING

● The anti-lock brake system is a sophis-ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-cidents resulting from careless or dan-gerous driving techniques. It can helpmaintain vehicle control during brakingon slippery surfaces, but remember thatthe stopping distance on slippery sur-faces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with the anti-lock brakesystem. Stopping distances may alsobe longer on rough, gravel or snow cov-ered roads, or if you are using tirechains. Tire type and condition may alsoaffect braking effectiveness. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from the ve-hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the re-sponsibility for safety of self and othersrests in the hands of the driver.



● Tire type and condition of tires may alsoaffect braking effectiveness.

● When replacing tires, install the speci-fied size of tires on all four wheels.

● When installing a spare tire, make sureit is the proper size and type as speci-fied on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label. For tire placard location in-formation, refer to “Tire and LoadingInformation label” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of thismanual.

● Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion of this manual.

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur-faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detectthese movements and control the braking andengine output to help improve vehicle stability.

● When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC)system is operating, the slip indicator in theinstrument panel blinks.

● When only the traction control system (TCS)portion of the vehicle dynamic control sys-tem is operating, the slip indicator will alsoblink.

● If the slip indicator blinks, the the road con-ditions are slippery. Be sure to adjust yourspeed and driving to these conditions. See“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamiccontrol off indicator light” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section.

● Indicator lightIf malfunction occurs in the system,the and indicator lights comeon in the instrument panel.As long as these warning lights are on, thetraction control function is canceled.

The VDC system uses a Brake Limited Slip Dif-ferential (LSD) system to improve vehicle trac-tion. The brake LSD system works when one ofthe driving wheels is spinning on a slippery sur-

face. The brake LSD system brakes the spinningwheel which distributes the driving power to theother drive wheel. If the vehicle is operated withthe vehicle dynamic control system off, all VDCand TCS functions will be turned off. The brakeLSD system and ABS will still operate with theVDC system OFF. If the brake LSD system or theABS is activated, the slip indicator light will blinkand you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel apulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal.

While the VDC system is operating, you may feela pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise orvibration from under the hood. This is normal andindicates that the VDC system is working prop-erly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM



WARNING

● The vehicle dynamic control system isdesigned to help improve driving stabil-ity but does not prevent accidents dueto abrupt steering operation at highspeeds or by careless or dangerousdriving techniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especially careful whendriving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the vehicle dynamic controlsystem may not operate properly andthe vehicle dynamic control off indica-tor light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer barsand bushings are not NISSAN approvedfor your vehicle or are extremely dete-riorated the vehicle dynamic controlsystem may not operate properly. Thiscould adversely affect vehicle handlingperformance, and the vehicle dynamiccontrol off indicator light may come on.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the vehicle dynamic control system maynot operate properly and the vehicledynamic control off indicator light maycome on. Do not drive on these types ofroads.

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the vehicle dy-namic control system may not operateproperly and the vehicle dynamic con-trol off indicator light may come on.

● The vehicle dynamic control system isnot a substitute for winter tires or tirechains on a snow covered road.

WARNING

● Always turn and look back before back-ing. The RSS is not a substitute forproper backing procedures.

● Read and understand the limitations ofthe rear sonar system as contained inthis section. Inclement weather may af-fect the function of the RSS; this mayinclude reduced performance or a falseactivation.

● This system is not designed to preventcontact with small or moving objects.

LSD0095

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if soequipped)



● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system may not detectsmaller objects, particularly those closeto the ground.

● If your vehicle sustains damage to therear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-aligned or bent, the sensing zone maybe altered causing inaccurate measure-ment of obstacles or false alarms.

The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone towarn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumperwhen R (Reverse) is selected. The system maynot detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5km/h) and may not detect certain angular ormoving objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 ft. (1.8meters) from the rear bumper with a decreasedcoverage area at the outer corners of the bumper,(refer to the illustration for approximate zone cov-erage areas). As you move closer to the obstacle,the rate of the tone increases. When the obstacleis less than 10 in. (25.0 cm) away, the tone willsound continuously. If the RSS detects a station-ary or receding object further than 10 in. (25.0cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone will

sound for only three seconds. Once the systemdetects an object approaching, the tone willsound again.

The RSS automatically turns on when the gearselector is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignitionis ON. The RSS OFF switch on the instrumentpanel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off.To turn the RSS off, the ignition must be ON, andthe gear selector in R (Reverse). An indicatorlight on the switch will illuminate when the systemis turned off. If the indicator light illuminates whenthe RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a failurein the RSS.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rearbumper fascia) free from snow, ice and largeaccumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensorswith sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, itwill affect the accuracy of the RSS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole.

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see ‘‘Engine cooling system’’ in the‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of thismanual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see ‘‘Battery’’ in the ‘‘Main-tenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of thismanual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING



For details, see ‘‘Changing engine coolant’’ in the‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord-ing to location. Check the local laws beforeinstalling tire chains. When installing tirechains, make sure they are of proper size for

the tires on your vehicle and are installedaccording to the chain manufacturer’s sug-gestions. Use only SAE Class “S”chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”chainsare designed to meet the minimum clear-ances between the tire and the closest ve-hicle suspension or body component re-quired to accommodate the use of a wintertraction device (tire chains or cables). Theminimum clearances are determined usingthe factory equipped tire size. Other typesmay damage your vehicle. Use chain ten-sioners when recommended by the tirechain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.Loose end links of the tire chain must besecured or removed to prevent the possibil-ity of whipping action damage to the fendersor underbody. If possible, avoid fully loadingyour vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehiclehandling and performance may be adverselyaffected.

Never install tire chains on spare tires. Donot use tire chains on dry roads.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.



● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.



6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Low tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-12


LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGSYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with the low tire pres-sure warning system, which displays the pres-sure of each tire independently (except the sparetire) on the display screen (if so equipped) bysending a signal from a sensor that is installed ineach wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with lowtire pressure (lower than 28 psi, 193 kPa), thelow tire pressure warning system will activate andwarn you of it by the low tire pressure warninglight. This system will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 20 MPH (32km/h). For more details, please refer to“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tirepressure information” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-tion and “Low tire pressure warning system” inthe “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightflashes while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the automatic transmissionis shifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency


● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks s1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tires2 to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools1. Remove the jack tool kit from the floor stor-

age area in the cargo area.

2. Remove the cargo area storage bin cover.

3. Unscrew and remove the jack.WCE0044 LCE0086

In case of emergency 6-3


4. Assemble the two pieces of the jack rod.Find the oval-shaped opening above themiddle of the license plate. Pass theT-shaped end of the jack rod through theopening and direct it toward the spare tirewinch, located directly above the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it isdesigned to be inserted at an angle asshown.

5. Fit the square end of the jack rod into thesquare hole of the wheel nut wrench to forma handle.

6. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod intothe T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap-ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged inthe spare tire winch and turn the jack rodcounterclockwise to lower the spare tire.

7. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,reach under the vehicle, remove the retainerchain, and carefully slide the tire from underthe rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-ing plate on the wheel and then lift thespare tire.

Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

LCE0084 LCE0085



● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Always refer to the illustration for the correctplacement and jack-up points for your specificvehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

NOTE:

Before jacking up the vehicle, make surethe ignition key is in the OFF position. If thevehicle is lifted up with the ignition key inthe ON position the auto-leveling suspen-sion (if so equipped) will become disabledafter 60 seconds. To reset the auto-levelingsuspension, cycle the ignition key ON/OFFone time.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Thejack-up points are indicated by stamped ar-rows on the side of the frame.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

WCE0097



3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jackas shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until thetire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove thetire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

LCE0087

WCE0063



4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-hicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehiclehas been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km)(also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thespecified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tireplacard affixed to the inside of the glovebox lid.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING



● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Shift the transmis-sion into P (Park). Switch off all unnecessaryelectrical systems (lights, heater, air condi-tioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (1) to positive(1) and negative (2) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

WCE0054



● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

WARNING

● Automatic transmission models cannotbe push-started or tow-started. Thismay cause transmission or other ve-hicle damage.

● Three-way catalyst equipped modelsshould not be started by pushing. Thethree-way catalyst may be damaged.

● Never try to start the vehicle by towingit. When the engine starts, the forwardsurge could cause the vehicle to collidewith the tow vehicle.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap while the engine is stillhot. When the radiator or coolant reser-voir cap is removed, pressurized hotwater will spurt out, possibly causingserious injury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading andthe illumination of the engine oil pressure/enginecoolant temperature high indicator light), or if youfeel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift lever toP (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air conditionertemperature control to maximum hot and fancontrol to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS



3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time when the coolanttemperature is high.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the reservoir tank with the enginerunning. Add coolant to the reservoir tank ifnecessary. Have your vehicle repaired at aNISSAN dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE



● Do not tow a trailer until your vehiclehas been driven at least 500 miles (800km).

For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSAN

Two-wheel drive modelsNISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (rear) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is necessary totow the vehicle with the front wheelsraised always use towing dollies underthe rear wheels.

● When towing automatic transmissionmodels with the front wheels on theground or on towing dollies:

– Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-tion, and secure the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with a rope orsimilar device. Never secure the steer-ing wheel by turning the ignition key tothe LOCK position. This may damagethe steering lock mechanism.

If the speed or distance must necessarily begreater, remove the propeller shaft before towingto prevent damage to the transmission.

ACE1037



Four-wheel drive modelsNISSAN recommends that towing dollies beused when towing your vehicle or place the ve-hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow 4WD models with any of thewheels on the ground as this may causeserious and expensive damage to thetransfer case and transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

WSD0097 LCE0083



CAUTION

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the main structural members ofthe vehicle or the towing hooks (if soequippd). Otherwise, the vehicle bodywill be damaged.

● Use the towing hook (if so equipped)only to free a vehicle stuck in sand,snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehiclefor a long distance using only the tow-ing hook.

● The towing hook is under tremendousforce when used to free a stuck vehicle.Never pull the hook at an angle.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle.

● Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or coolingsystems.

● Pull devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.




MEMO

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5


In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable tothe effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. After wax-ing, polishing is recommended to removebuilt-up residue and to avoid a “weathered” ap-pearance.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

● If the surface does not polish easily, use a“road tar” remover and wax again.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care


UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASSUse glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELSWash the wheels regularly, especially during win-ter months in areas where road salt is used. If notremoved, road salt could discolor the wheels.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leathersurfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened inmild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry,soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, readthe manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fab-ric protectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, polishes, oils, clean-ing fluids, solvents, detergents orammonia-based cleaners as they maydamage the leather’s natural finish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

CLEANING INTERIOR

Appearance and care 7-3


FLOOR MATSThe use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matter whatmats are used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly positioned inthe footwell to prevent interference withpedal operation. Mats should be maintainedwith regular cleaning and replaced if they be-come excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s sideonly)This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floormats have been specially designed for your ve-hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has agrommet hole incorporated in it. Position the matby placing the floor mat bracket hook through thefloor mat grommet hole while centering the mat inthe footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal air bags” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.WAI0006



MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

1. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

MoistureAccumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle, and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidityCorrosion will be accelerated:

● in areas of high relative humidity.

● in areas where the temperatures stay abovefreezing.

● where atmospheric pollution exists.

● where road salt is used.Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5



MEMO

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18

Parking brake and brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Checking parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Checking brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36


Your new NISSAN has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements with longerservice intervals to save you both time andmoney. However, some day-to-day and regularmaintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as itsemission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide.” You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economic way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself


When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires,make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and checkfor any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheelalignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet .

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) positionmechanism On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selector lever inthe P position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure it has the properdistance under it when depressed fully. Check

the brake booster function. Be certain to keep thefloor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake* Check that the lever has theproper travel and confirm that your vehicle is heldsecurely on a fairly steep hill with only the parkingbrake applied.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraintsmove up and down smoothly and the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3


Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicleThe maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brakefluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines onthe reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas

where mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.



When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. Move the shift selectorlever to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may come onat any time without warning, even if theignition key is in the OFF position and theengine is not running. To avoid injury,

always disconnect the negative batterycable before working near the fan.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models with themultiport fuel injection (MFI) system,the fuel filter or fuel lines should be

serviced by a NISSAN dealer becausethe fuel lines are under high pressureeven when the engine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS



1. Battery2. Fuse/fusible link box3. Transmission dipstick4. Engine oil filler cap5. Brake fluid reservoir6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir7. Air cleaner8. Radiator cap9. Power steering fluid reservoir10. Engine oil dipstick11. Coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

LDI0368

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze cool-ant solution. The anti-freeze solution containsrust and corrosion inhibitors; therefore, additionalengine cooling system additives are not neces-sary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

Outside temperaturedown to

GenuineNISSANLong Life

Anti-freezecoolant orequivalent

Demineral-ized or dis-tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sureto use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAnti-freeze Coolant (green) or equivalentwith the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilledwater. The use of other types of coolantsolutions or coolant colors, such as or-ange, may damage the engine coolingsystem.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

The coolant reservoir is a pressurized tank.When installing the cap, tighten it until aclicking sound is heard.

LDI0369

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM



If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Serious burns could be caused by highpressure fluid escaping from theradiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

LDI0370

ENGINE OIL



5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks sB . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark sA , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill sC .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it coun-terclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.

5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

LDI0371 LDI0372



If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrenchby turning it counterclockwise. Then removethe oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

LDI0373



5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surfacewith a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the mounting surface of theengine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

WARNING

● Use only Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF.Do not mix with other fluids.

● Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATFwill cause deterioration in driveabilityand automatic transmission durability,and may damage the automatic trans-mission, which is not covered by theNISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is alsodescribed on caution labels located in the enginecompartment.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add GenuineNISSAN PSF fluid. Remove the cap and fillthrough the opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.

● Recommended fluid is GenuineNISSAN PSF or equivalent.

WDI0256

5-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID



For further brake fluid specification information,refer to “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluidmay damage the brake system. The use ofimproper fluids can damage the brakesystem and affect the vehicle’s stoppingability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

WINDOW WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.Add window washer fluid when the light comeson.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift thecap off the reservoir tank and pour the windowwasher fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

LDI0374 LDI0375

BRAKE FLUID WINDOW WASHER FLUID



Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount of win-dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.



● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Anycorrosion should be washed off with a solu-tion of baking soda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-ated by the battery is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

BATTERY



1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriveras shown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0224

LDI0302



1. Power steering fluid pump2. Crankshaft3. Generator4. Air conditioner5. Water pump6. Cooling fan

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If thebelt is in poor condition or is loose, have itreplaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tippedspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance schedule, but do not reusethe spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

LDI0399 WDI0005

DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS



WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, please see yourNISSAN dealer for assistance.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenanceintervals shown in the “NISSAN Service andMaintenance Guide.” When replacing the filter,wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housingand the cover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

s1 Loosen the screw.

s2 Disconnect the electrical connector.

s3 Push down on the clips and remove the aircleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner filter.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce-dure:

LDI0376

AIR CLEANER



1. Remove the two lower glove box screws. 2. Open the glove box, then remove the fourupper glove box screw. It is not necessary toremove the two glove box striker screws.Remove the glove box assembly from theinstrument panel to access the in-cabin mi-crofilter cover.

3. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove thefilter cover.

WDI0406 WDI0407 LDI0387



NOTE:

The filters are marked with air flow arrows.The end of the filter with the arrow shouldface the rear of the vehicle. The arrowsshould face downward.

4. Insert the first filter into the housing and slideit over to the right. Insert the second filterinto the housing.

5. Replace the filter cover.

6. Install the glove box door.

7. Fill out the date information on the smallreplacement label and attach it to the glovebox lid.

CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

s2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

s3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in thegroove.

LDI0404 WDI0408

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES



CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the washer nozzle s1 . This maycause clogging or improper windshield washeroperation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin s2 .

WDI0378



Rear window wiper blade

s1 Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win-dow.

s2 Push the wiper blade in and pivot until theblade becomes free.

s3 Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm andsnap into place.

LDI0379



CHECKING PARKING BRAKEFrom the released position, firmly push the park-ing brake down. If the number of clicks is out ofthe range listed, see a NISSAN dealer.

● 3–4 clicks under depressing force of 44 lb(196 N).

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance Abetween the upper surface of the pedal and themetal floor. If it is out of the range shown, see aNISSAN dealer.

Distance A: Under depression force of110 lb (490 N)

3 1/2 in (90 mm) or more

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicatorsThe disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0293 WDI0229

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL



BRAKE BOOSTERCheck the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release thebrake pedal several times. When brakepedal movement (distance of travel) remainsthe same from one pedal application to thenext, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start theengine. The pedal height should drop a little.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop theengine. Keep the pedal depressed for about30 seconds. The pedal height should notchange.

4. Run the engine for one minute without de-pressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.Depress the brake pedal several times. Thepedal travel distance will decrease graduallywith each depression as the vacuum is re-leased from the booster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

LDI0380

FUSES



5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a knowngood fuse.

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

WDI0200 LDI0381



Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

s1 Open the lid using a coin.

s2 Remove the battery.

s3 Install a new battery with the “+” facingdown.

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 orequivalent.

s4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the LOCK button, then the UNLOCKbutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the manufacturer for compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

LPD0214

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT



HEADLIGHTSReplacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-cause the headlight assembly must be removedfrom the vehicle for bulb replacement, see yourNISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Low beam:Wattage: 51Bulb no.: 9006*

High beam:Wattage: 60Bulb no.: 9005*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latestparts information.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture and smoke may enterthe headlight body and affect the per-formance of the headlight.

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Wattage 32 Bulb No. 881*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latestparts information.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog lightfor a long period of time as dust, mois-ture and smoke may enter the fog lightbody and affect the performance of thefog light.

LIGHTS



1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

2. The fog light is accessible in front of the fronttire and behind the bumper.

3. Disconnect the bulb connector s1 .

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and re-move.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the foglight assembly. Do not shake or rotate thebulb when removing it. Do not touch theglass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE:

To adjust the fog light vertical aim: Accessthe aiming screw from underneath the frontbumper. The aiming screw is located on thebottom of the fog light housing. Turn thescrew clockwise to raise the pattern. Turnthe screw counterclockwise to lower thepattern.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly

High 60 HB3/9005

Low 51 HB4/9006

Park/Turn 8/27 3157AK

Sidemarker 3.8 194

Front fog light 32 881

Puddle lamp 8 906

Room/map lights 8 –

Personal lights 5 2GL T2P

Footwell 3.4 158

Glove box light 3.4 158

Vanity mirror light 1.32 –

Step light 3.8 194

Cargo light 7 28

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

High-mounted stoplight*

– –

Rear combination light

Tail/Stop 7/27 3157K

Backup (reversing) 18 921

Turn 27 3156K

License plate light 5 168

*: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at aNISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

LDI0382



1. Room/map light2. Front personal lights3. Step light4. Puddle lamp5. High-mount stoplight6. Cargo light7. License plate light8. Rear combination light9. Headlight assembly10. Fog light

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lampand/or cover.

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb installationLDI0383

WDI0263



Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.

Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.

Room/map lightsLDI0389

Personal lights – Type ALDI0364

Vanity mirrorLDI0385



Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.Step light

LDI0341

Puddle lightLDI0388

Cargo lightWDI0233



If you have a flat tire, see the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the spare)often and always prior to long distance trips. Therecommended tire pressure specifications areshown on the Tire and Loading Information labelunder the 9Recommended Cold Tire InflationPressure9 heading. The Tire and Loading Infor-mation label is affixed to the driver side centerpillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularlybecause:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly when driven overpotholes or other objects or if the vehiclestrikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked when thetires are cold. The tires are considered COLDafter the vehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) atmoderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including under in-flation, may adversely affect tire life andvehicle handling.

License plate lightLDI0384

Rear combination lightWDI0403

WHEELS AND TIRES



WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can fail sud-denly and cause an accident.

● The vehicle weight capacity is indicatedon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. Do not load your vehicle beyondthis capacity. Overloading your vehiclemay result in reduced tire life, unsafeoperating conditions due to prematuretire failure, or unfavorable handlingcharacteristics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading beyond thespecified capacity may also result infailure of other vehicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, or wheneveryou heavily load your vehicle, use a tirepressure gauge to ensure that the tirepressures are at the specified level.

● Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH(137 km/h) unless it is equipped with highspeed rated tires. Driving faster than 85MPH (137 km/h) may result in tire failure,loss of control and possible injury.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Tire and loading information label (forUS)

s1 Seating capacity: The maximum number ofoccupants that should be seated in the ve-hicle.

s2 Vehicle load limit: See loading information inthe Technical and consumer informationsection.

s3 Original tire size: The size of the tires origi-nally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

s4 Recommended cold tire inflation pressure:Inflate the tires to this pressure when thetires are cold. Tires are considered COLDafter the vehicle has been parked for 3 ormore hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recommendedcold tire inflation is set by the manufacturerto provide the best tire wear and vehiclehandling characteristics based on the ve-hicles GVWR.

s5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later in thissection.

s6 and s7 . Spare tire size or compact spare tiresize (if so equipped)

LDI0392



Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto thevalve stem. Do not press too hard or forcethe valve stem sideways, or air will escape. Ifthe hissing of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure, reposi-tion the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stemand compare to the specification shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much airis added, press the core of the valve stembriefly with the tip of the gauge stem torelease pressure. Recheck the pressure andadd or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, includ-ing the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-tion Pressure

FrontOriginal Tire

P285/70R17P265/70R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

RearOriginal Tire

P285/70R17P265/70R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire P285/70R17P265/70R18

240 kPa, 35 PSITIRE LABELINGFederal law requires tire manufacturers to placestandardized information on the sidewall of alltires. This information identifies and describesthe fundamental characteristics of the tire andalso provides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TIN can beused to identify the tire in case of a recall.

LDI0393 WDI0394



(1) Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The 9P9 indicates the tire is designed forpassenger vehicles.

2. Three-digit number: This number gives thewidth in millimeters of the tire from sidewalledge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number: This number, known asthe aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio ofheight to width.

4. R: The 9R9 stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number: This number is the wheelor rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number: This number isthe tire’s load index. It is a measurement ofhow much weight each tire can support. Youmay not find this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. Tire speed rating. You should not drive thevehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

WDI0395



(2) TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire(example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Department OfTransportation.9 The symbol can be placedabove, below or to the left or right of TireIdentification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifica-tion mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

6. Four numbers represent the week and yearthe tire was built. For example, the numbers3103 means the 31st week of 2003.

(3) Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coatedfabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also mustindicate the materials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.

(4) Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pres-sure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceedthe maximum permissible inflation pressure.

(5) Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilo-grams and pounds that can be carried by the tire.When replacing the tires on the vehicle, alwaysuse a tire that has the same load rating as thefactory installed tire.

(6) Term of ”tubeless” or ”tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube(“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

(7) The word ”radial”

The word 9radial9 is shown if the tire has radialstructure.

(8) Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are definedthroughout this section, Intended OutboardSidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a white-wall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same molding on the othersidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facingsidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

WDI0396



TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating and avail-ability. Replacement tires may have alower speed rating than the factoryequipped tires, and may not match thepotential maximum vehicle speed.Never exceed the maximum speed rat-ing of the tire.


All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class 9S9 chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tire size. Other typesmay damage your vehicle. Use chain tensionerswhen recommended by the tire chain manufac-turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of thetire chain must be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damage to thefenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, yourvehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handlingand performance may be adversely affected.



Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on clearpaved roads.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”section in this manual for tire replacing proce-dures.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecifications at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check and ad-just the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire in the tirerotation.


WDI0258



1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically inspectedfor wear, cracking, bulging or objectscaught in the tread. If excessive wear,cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found,the tire(s) should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-in treadwear indicators. When the wear indica-tors are visible, the tire(s) should bereplaced.

● Improper service of the spare tire mayresult in serious personal injury. If it isnecessary to repair the spare tire, con-tact a NISSAN dealer.


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,speedometer calibration, headlight aimand bumper height. Some of these ef-fects may lead to accidents and couldresult in serious personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics and/orinterference with the brakediscs/drums. Such interference canlead to decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” sectionof this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.

WDI0259




● Do not install a deformed wheel or tireeven if it has been repaired. Suchwheels or tires could have structuraldamage and could fail without warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.


Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet .

Care of wheels● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.



9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Air conditioner system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Towing load/specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-24Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-25

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26


The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 28 gal 23-1/4 gal 105.8 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1

Engine oil *7Drain and Refill

With oil filter change 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt 6.2 • API Certification Mark *2 *3• API grade SL, Energy Conserving *2 *3• ILSAC grade GF-III*2 *3Without oil filter change 6-1/4 qt 5-1/4 qt 5.9

Cooling systemWith reservoir 15-1/4 qt 12-5/8 qt 14.4 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF *4

Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*8

Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No.116)

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*6

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type DH-PS or equivalent*6

Transfer fluid 2-3/8 qt 2 qt 2.2 Genuine Nissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN AutomaticTransmission Fluid*8

Front final drive oil 3-3/8 pt 2-7/8pt 1.6 API GL-5 Viscosity SAE 80W-90*9Rear final drive oil 3-3/4 pt 3-1/8 pt 1.75 API GL-5 Viscosity SAE 80W-90*9Windshield washer fluid (shared between front andrear wipers)

1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”*3: For further details, see “Recommended SAE engine oil viscosity.”*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty.*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label.”*7: For further details, see “Changing engine oil.”*8: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), Dexron™ III/Mercon™, or equivalent ATF may also be used.*9: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0° C (32° F).

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information


FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tips

In most parts of North America, you should useunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of atleast 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number. How-ever, you may use unleaded gasoline with anoctane rating as low as 85 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)number in high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft(1,219 m)] such as: Colorado, Montana, NewMexico, Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada,

Technical and consumer information 9-3


southern Idaho, western South Dakota, westernNebraska, and the part of Texas which is directlysouth of New Mexico.

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than stated above can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose engine oil with the cor-rect quality and viscosity to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. NISSAN recom-mends the use of a low friction oil (energy con-serving oil) in order to improve fuel economy andconserve energy. Oils which do not have thespecified quality label should not be used as theycould cause engine damage.

Only those engine oils with the American Petro-leum Institute (API) CERTIFICATION MARK on

the front of the container should be used. Thistype of oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH, orSJ and Energy Conserving II categories.

If you cannot find engine oil with the API CERTI-FICATION MARK, use API grade SL EnergyConserving oil. An oil with a single designationSL, or in combination with other categories (forexample, SL/CF) may also be used if one with theAPI CERTIFICATION MARK cannot be found. AnILSAC grade GF-III oil can also be used.

NISSAN recommends mineral based oils. Theseoils must, however, meet the API quality and SAEviscosity ratings specified for your vehicle.

WTI0082



Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. The chart “Rec-ommended SAE viscosity number” shows therecommended oil viscosities for the expectedambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosityother than that recommended could cause seri-ous engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals”.

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITYNUMBER

● SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for alltemperatures. SAE 10W-30 or SAE10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if theambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C).

ATI1028



AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANTRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant,NISSAN A/C system oil DH-PS or the exactequivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubri-cant will cause severe damage to the airconditioning system and will require thereplacement of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.



ENGINE

Model VK56DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 338.78 (5,552)

Firing order 1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2

Idle speed

See the “Emission Control label” on the underside of thehood.

A/T (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug

Standard PLFR5A-11

Hot PLFR4A-11

Cold PLFR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS



WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

17 x 7.5J

18 x 8.0J

Tires

P285/70R17

P265/70R18

Spare tire Full size

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 206.9(5,255)

Overall width in (mm) 78.8(2,001)

Overall height

2wd with roof rack in (mm) 76.7(1,947)

4wd with roof rack in (mm) 76.9(1,953)

2wd without roof rack in (mm) 75.3(1,912)

4wd without roof rack in (mm) 75.5(1,918)

Front tread in (mm) 67.5(1,715)

Rear tread in (mm) 67.5(1,715)

Wheelbase in (mm) 123.2(3,130)

Gross vehicle weightrating

lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S.certification label” on thecenter pillar between thedriver’s side front andside doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)



When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

LTI0085 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION



ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M-.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown.This label contains valuable vehicle information,such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR),Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month andyear of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Num-ber (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached as shown.

WTI0095 WTI0099 LTI0087



TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed asshown.

Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

s1 Make holes on the plastic finisher at thelocation mark (small dimple) using a 0.31 in(8 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill.Install the license plate holder using the twoscrews provided with the holder.

s2 Mount the license plate using two M6-14mm bolts.

License plate bolt tightening torque:3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

WTI0100 WTI0101 LTI0093

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE



WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-sion, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured orkilled.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the fol-lowing terms before loading your vehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle)- vehicle weight including: standard and op-tional equipment, fluids, emergency tools,and spare tire assembly. This weight doesnot include passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weightplus the combined weight of passengersand cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -maximum total weight (load) limit specifiedfor the vehicle.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maxi-mum weight (load) limit specified for thefront or rear axle.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITYDo not exceed the load limit of your vehicleshown as 9The combined weight of occupantsand cargo9 on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. Do not exceed the number of occupantsshown as 9Seating Capacity9 on Tire and LoadingInformation label.

To get 9the combined weight of occupants andcargo9, add the weight of all occupants, then addthe total luggage weight. Examples are shownbelow.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION



Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weightof occupants and cargo should never ex-ceed XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s tireplacard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms or XXXpounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 * 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm the youdo not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for your vehicle.

WTI0091



SECURING THE LOADThere are tie down hooks located in the cargoarea as shown. The tie down hooks can be usedto secure cargo with ropes or other types ofstraps.

Do not apply a total load of more than 55lbs. (245 N) to a single sA plastic hook or 44lbs. (196 N) to a single sB plastic hookwhen securing cargo.

Do not apply a total load of more than 110lbs. (490 N) to a single metal floor tie-downhook when securing cargo.

WARNING


● Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damage couldoccur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could result inloss of control and cause personalinjury.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWR orGAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certi-fication label.

● Do not load the front and rear axle to theGAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING


Cargo area ceiling tie-down hooksLTI0089

Cargo area floor tie-down hooksLTI0090



● Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damage couldoccur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could result inloss of control and cause personalinjury.

● Overloading not only can shorten thelife of your vehicle and the tire, but canalso cause unsafe vehicle handling andlonger braking distances. This maycause a premature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accident andpersonal injury. Failures caused byoverloading are not covered by the ve-hicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts thatcould affect the balance of your vehicle. When thevehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh thefront and the rear wheels separately to determineaxle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceedeither of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR).The total of the axle loads should not exceed thegross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratingsare given on the vehicle certification label. If weightratings are exceeded, move or remove items tobring all weights below the ratings.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A Nissan Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) isavailable from a NISSAN dealer. This guide in-cludes information on trailer towing ability and thespecial equipment required for proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the following TowingLoad/Specification Chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake sys-tem MUST be used.

The maximum GCWR (Gross Combined WeightRating) should not exceed the value specified inthe following Towing Load/ Specification Chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of thetowing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greaterthan these or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced on very steep grades or in low tractionsituations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside

TOWING A TRAILER



temperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.Pull to the side of the road to a safe area.Allow the engine to cool and return tonormal operation. See “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures are not covered byNISSAN warranties. A NISSAN TrailerTowing Guide (U.S. only) containing infor-mation on trailer towing ability and thespecial equipment required may be ob-tained from a NISSAN dealer.

Tongue loadWhen using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 -15 percent of the total trailer load within themaximum tongue load limits shown in the follow-ing Towing Load/Specification Chart. If thetongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargoto allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum gross vehicleweight/maximum gross axle weightThe gross vehicle weight of the towing vehiclemust not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating(GVWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S. certificationlabel. The gross vehicle weight equals the com-bined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passen-gers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and anyother optional equipment. In addition, front or reargross axle weight must not exceed the gross axleweight rating (GAWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S.certification label.

CA0009 ATI1025



TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATIONCHART

US & CAN

2WD 4WD

TowingCapacity*1

w/o towpackage

6,500 lb.(2,948 kg)

6,500 lb.(2,948 kg)

with towpackage*2

9,100 lb.(4,128 kg)

9,100 lb.(4,128 kg)

TongueLoad

w/o towpackage

650 lb.(295 kg)

650 lb.(295 kg)

with towpackage*2

910 lb.(413 kg)

910 lb.(413 kg)

GrossCombined

WeightRating

w/o towpackage

11,999 lb.(5,443 kg)

11,999 lb.(5,443 kg)

with towpackage*2

14,599 lb.(6,622 kg)

14,799 lb.(6,713 kg)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculatedassuming a base vehicle with driver and anyoptions required to achieve the rating. Additionalpassengers, cargo and/or optional equipmentwill add weight to the vehicle and reduce yourvehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

*2: Requires weight distribution hitch.

TOWING SAFETYTrailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optionaltrailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Thishitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity ofthis vehicle when the proper towing equipment isused. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ballthat is rated for the trailer to be towed. GenuineNissan ball mounts and hitch balls are availablefrom your NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optionaltrailer tow package, check the towing capacity ofyour bumper hitch or receiver-type framemounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for yourvehicle and trailer. A genuine Nissan trailer hitchis available from your NISSAN dealer. Make surethe trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicleto help avoid personal injury or property damagedue to sway caused by crosswinds, rough roadsurfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

● Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier thanthe weight rating of the hitch compo-nents. Never exceed the weight ratingof the hitch components. Doing so cancause serious personal injury or prop-erty damage

Hitch ballChoose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.



Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount andthe ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.Choose a proper class ball mount based on thetrailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount shouldbe chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with theground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or 9dead weight9 ball mount isone that is designed to carry the whole amount oftongue weight and gross weight directly on theball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitchThis type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling”or“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ballmount and to the trailer to distribute the tongueweight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve-hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a giventrailer, and need some of the tongue weighttransferred through the frame and pushing downon the front wheels. This gives stability to the towvehicle.

Another reason to have a weight distributing ballmount is to comply with the rating on your re-ceiver. Most receivers have a weight carryingrating of 5000 lbs. gross weight, 500 lbs. tongueweight and a weight distribution rating of 10,000

lbs. gross weight, 1000 lbs. tongue weight. Thismeans that without using a weight distributingballmount, the receiver is only designed to carry5000 lbs.

When hooking up a trailer using a weight distrib-uting hitch, always refer to the hitch manufactur-er’s instructions.

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.With the ignition on and all door closed,allow the vehicle to stand for several minutesso that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point onthe front and rear bumpers at the center ofthe vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjustthe hitch equalizers so that the front bumperheight is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) ofthe reference height measured in step 2. Therear bumper should be no higher than thereference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributinghitch so the rear of the bumper is nohigher than the measured referenceheight when the trailer is attached. If therear bumper is higher than the measuredreference height when loaded, the vehiclemay handle unpredictably which couldcause a loss of vehicle control and causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Sway control device

Sway control devices are used to help control theeffects of sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, andbuffeting caused by other vehicles. Make sure thesway control device is compatible with the trail-er’s brake system.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

Class II hitch

A Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,510 kg).



Class III hitch

A Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).

Class IV hitch

A Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,545 kg). Aweight distributing hitch should be used to towtrailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IVtrailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb(4,545 kg) maximum weight rating, but your ve-hicle is only capable of towing the maximumtrailer weights shown in the TowingLoad/Specification Chart earlier in this section.

CAUTION

● Special hitches which include frame re-inforcements are required for towingabove 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genu-ine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts andhitch balls for pickup trucks and sportutility vehicles are available at aNISSAN dealer.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thehitch and/or receiver when not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

● When towing with the hitch ballmounted to the rear bumper, do notmake sharp turns. The trailer may con-tact the bumper and cause damage tothe bumper or trailer.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tiresto the recommended cold tire pressure indi-cated on the tire placard.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating andproper inflation pressure should be in accor-dance with the trailer and tire manufacturer’sspecifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safetychains can be attached to the bumper if the hitchball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lightsTrailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer. Vehiclesequipped with the optional trailer tow packageare equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness connec-tor. If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pinconnector, an adapter will be needed to connectthe trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are avail-able at auto parts stores and hitch retailers.

Trailer brakesIf your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed.



WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rear view mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections andback slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing.

● Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope isnot recommended; however, if you must doso, first block the wheels and apply the park-ing brake, and then move the transmissionshift selector lever into the P (Park) position.If you move the shift selector lever to the P(Park) position before blocking the wheels

and applying the parking brake, transmissiondamage could occur.

● When going down a hill, shift into a lower gearand use the engine braking effect. When go-ing up a long grade, downshift the transmis-sion to a lower gear and reduce speed toreduce chances of engine overloading and/oroverheating. However, for long steep grades,do not stay in 1st gear when driving above 35MPH (56 km/h) or 2nd gear when drivingabove 58 MPH (93 km/h).

● If the engine coolant rises to an extremelyhigh temperature when the air conditionersystem is on, turn off the air conditioner.Coolant heat can be additionally vented byopening the windows, switching the fancontrol to high and setting the temperaturecontrol to the HOT position.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.



● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmlygrip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead,and immediately (but gradually) reduce ve-hicle speed. This combination will help sta-bilize the vehicle. Never increase speed.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not useoverdrive.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually

● Do not use cruise control while towing a trailer.

● Some states or provinces have specificspeed limits for vehicles that are towing trail-ers. Obey the local speed limits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When stopped in traffic for long periods oftime in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P(Park) position.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

Tow modeTow mode should be used when pulling a heavytrailer or hauling a heavy load. Press the tow buttonto activate the tow mode. The tow indicator in theinstrument panel illuminates when the tow mode isselected. Press the Tow button again to turn thetow mode OFF. The Tow mode is automaticallycancelled when the key is turned OFF.

The Tow mode does the following:

● Reduces transmissions shifts when pulling atrailer or hauling a load.

● Provides similar shift feel to driver when thevehicle is towing.

The Tow mode should be used when the vehicleand trailer weight is at least 75% of the vehicle’sGCWR. Tow mode is most useful in the followingdriving conditions when towing a heavy trailer orhauling a heavy load:

● Rolling terrain.

● Stop and go traffic.

● Busy parking lots.

Driving the vehicle in the Tow mode with notrailer/load or light trailer/light load will not causeany damage. However, fuel economy may bereduced and the transmission/engine drivingcharacteristics may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.



FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an automatictransmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUSTbe placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.

WARNING

Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.Installing a snowplow may affect vehiclehandling. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

Treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon tire wear rate when tested under controlledconditions on specified government test courses.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear oneand a half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern-ment course as a tire graded 100. However,relative tire performance depends on actual driv-ing conditions, and may vary significantly due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

SNOW PLOW UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING



WARNING

The traction grade assigned to your ve-hicle tires is based on straight-aheadbraking traction tests and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hydroplan-ing or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, andC. They represent a tire’s resistance to heatbuild-up, and its ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-perature can cause tire material to degenerate,reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures canlead to sudden tire failure. Grade C correspondsto a performance level which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B rep-resent higher levels of performance on laboratorytest wheels than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, CA 90248-0191

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY



If you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the Na-tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236. You mayalso write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-portation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motor vehiclesafety from the Hotline.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Con-sumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

In Hawaii call 1-808-836-0888.

Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, drive the vehicle through the followingpattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. Ifyou cannot or do not want to perform the drivingpattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to traffic con-ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C. Al-low the engine to idle until the gauge needlepoints between the C and H (normal oper-ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the acceleratorpedal completely and keep it released for atleast 6 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 5minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least threetimes.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-able between steps. Do not stop the engine untilstep 7 is completed.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (USonly)

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST



A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-639-8841www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

DDS Distribution Service, Ltd.20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION



For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for the 2004 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

DDS Distribution Service, Ltd.20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikelyevent, there is some important information youshould know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorizethe use of non-genuine collision parts in order tocut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSANcollision parts!If you want your vehicle to be restored using partsmade to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-tions – if you want to help it to last and hold itsresale value, the solution is simple. Tell yourinsurance agent and your repair shop toonly use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-tection and maintain the resale value of yourvehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, usingGenuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-necessary excess wear and tear expenses at theend of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones tominimize the risk that the hood will penetrate thewindshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide suchbuilt in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts oftenshow premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to repairyour vehicle. And some states have enacted lawsthat restrict insurance companies from authoriz-ing the use of non-genuine collision parts duringthe new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-tect you, so you can take action to protect your-self.

It’s your right!If you should need further information visit us at:www.nissanusa.com.



10 Index

4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

A

Adjusting pedal position . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . .1-30, 2-16Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-15Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-24Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11Air conditioner system refrigerant andlubrication recommendations . . . . . . . .9-6Heater and air conditioner controls .4-12, 4-21Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-23Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16Alarm system (See vehicle security system) .2-20Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . .5-25Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-13Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

AM-FM-SAT radio with compact disc(CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-35Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-30FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-38

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-20Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-46Automatic transmission position indicatorlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Driving with automatic transmission. . . . .5-9Transmission selector lever lock release .5-13

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-18Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7AUX jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37

B

Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Back door release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Battery replacement(See remote keyless entry system) . . . .3-9, 8-24Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8

Belts (See drive belts) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . .5-25Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-26Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-19, 8-21Parking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-14Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-12Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26

C

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Captain’s chair adjustment (2nd row). . . . . .1-5Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38CD changer (See audio system). . . . . . . .4-35CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-30

Z ——

09/18/03—tmchalpi X

Check engine indicator light(See malfunction indicator light) . . . . . . . .2-17Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-58Child restraints . . . . . . .1-33, 1-34, 1-40, 1-56

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . .1-40Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-59

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28, 4-33

(models with navigation system) . . . . . .4-9Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-30Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 2-40Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-38Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12, 4-21Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-23

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . .1-26

D

Daytime running light system(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Digital video disc DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Drive positioner, Automatic. . . . . . . . . . .3-20Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Driving with automatic transmission. . . . .5-9Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-10Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-23Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-8Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-4Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-28Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-22Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Fuel filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

10-2

Z ——

09/18/03—tmchalpi X

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Fuel filler lid and cap . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

G

Garage door opener, HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Gauge

Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-6Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Volt meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glass hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

H

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-28Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-24

Headphones (See NISSAN mobileentertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Heater

Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12, 4-21Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-13, 4-22Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-23

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-51Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Hook

Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-21, 3-2, 5-8Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . .3-18Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-27Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Keyless entry system(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-5

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11Emission control information label . . . . .9-10Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-29

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-11Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-30, 2-16Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-26Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-12Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-24Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-15Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-16Passenger air bag and statuslight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23, 2-18Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

10-3

Z ——

09/17/03—tbrooks X

Security indicator light . . . . . . . .1-23, 2-18Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51

LockBack door release . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-5Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . .2-15Low tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . .5-3Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-16Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . . .2-43Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12Luggage storage(see vehicle loading information). . . . . . . .2-40

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-40Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). . . . . . . .2-17Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-27

MirrorAutomatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . .3-18Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

N

NISSAN mobile entertainment system(MES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41Nissan vehicle immobilizer system(NVIS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21, 3-2, 5-8

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-3Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-4Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-25Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

P

ParkingParking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-14Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Pedal position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Power vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . .1-40Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-31Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . . . .1-27Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

10-4

Z ——


R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-50Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-35FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-38

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . . .2-30Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Rear window wiper and washer switches. . .2-23Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9Remote controller (See NISSAN mobileentertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . .3-5Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-24Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-5Child seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-24

Screen (See NISSAN mobile entertainmentsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4Second row bench seats . . . . . . . . . .1-7Second row captain’s chair . . . . . . . . .1-5

Seat beltChild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-34Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-31Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . .1-27Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-40Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-39Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-35

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-20Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2

Second row captain’s chair adjustment. . . . .1-5Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .1-23, 2-18Security system (Nissan vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start. . . . . . . . .2-21, 3-2, 5-8Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Shifting

Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . .5-11Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-39Side air bag system (See supplemental side airbag, curtain and rollover air bag systems). . .1-26Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-8Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

SteeringPower steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . . .4-38Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

Overhead storage compartment . . . . . .2-36Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36, 2-40Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . .1-29Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-30, 2-16Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-22Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-29Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

10-5

Z ——


Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-14Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-46Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-28Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-24Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . .2-30Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-22

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Theft (Nissan vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21, 3-2, 5-8Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36

Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-22Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-15

Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-58Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Towing

2-wheel drive models. . . . . . . . . . . .6-114-wheel drive models. . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Towing load/specification chart . . . . . .9-17Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

TransceiverHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-51

TransmissionDriving with automatic transmission. . . . .5-9Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-13

Travel (See registering your vehicle in anothercountry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Turn signal switch (See headlight andturn signal switch) . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24, 2-27

U

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-22

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-30Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-26Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12, 7-2Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Vehicle security system(Nissan vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21, 3-2, 5-8Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Volt meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

W

Warning4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-30, 2-16Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-13Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-14Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-14Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-28Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-15Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-16Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-23Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-20Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-29Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

10-6

Z ——


Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-22

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-45Manual vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Power vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-22Wiper

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-22Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18

10-7

Z ——


RECOMMENDED FUEL:Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● API Certification Mark

● API grade SL, Energy Conserving

● ILSAC grade GF-III

● 5W-30 Viscosity preferred

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found inthe “Starting and driving” section of this manual.Follow these recommendations for the future re-liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Z b15—nna -—


1. Engine coolant 8-72. Battery 8-133. Power steering fluid 8-114. Automatic transmission fluid 8-115. Heater and air conditioner 4-12; Audio

system 4-246. Passenger supplemental air bag 1-147. Spare tire 6-28. Rear door lock 9-129. Fuel filler cap 3-15; Fuel recommenda-

tions 9-310. Seat belts 1-3111. Door locks 3-312. Driver supplemental air bag 1-1413. Hood release 3-1014. Meters and gauges 2-315. Brake fluid 8-1216. Engine oil 8-817. Window washer fluid 8-12

WGS0021

QUICK REFERENCE

Z wzw—nna -—


2004 armada owner's manual

Automotive

vehiclesthis manual

manual containwhen

owners manual forsafety

maneuver difmanual

warningall information

findwarningsome information

safety precautions

addiimportant information